Sie sind auf Seite 1von 464

-i-

5000iPS
CHAPTER II OPERATION

CONTENTS

1. LCT SETUP .................................................................................................................. 1-1


1.1 General ...................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Conventions Used in this Document .......................................................................................1-1
1.3 LCT Communication Interface ................................................................................................1-1
1.3.1 Communications ..............................................................................................................1-1
1.3.2 Local Port Interface .........................................................................................................1-2
1.4 Hardware Requirements .........................................................................................................1-3
1.5 Software Requirements ..........................................................................................................1-3
1.6 Operating System Environment ..............................................................................................1-3
1.6.1 Verify Internet Explorer ....................................................................................................1-4
1.6.2 Verify TCI/IP Settings ......................................................................................................1-5
1.7 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software......................................................................1-8
1.7.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8 .........................................................................................1-8
1.7.2 Mozilla Firefox™ Version 3.6.x ......................................................................................1-12
2. START UP / SHUT DOWN ........................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 General ...................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Start Up...................................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 Shut Down ..............................................................................................................................2-2
3. INITIAL SET UP............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Login, Logout and Exit ............................................................................................................3-1
3.2.1 Log In to NE.....................................................................................................................3-1
3.2.2 Log Out from NE..............................................................................................................3-4
3.2.3 Exit WebLCT ...................................................................................................................3-5
3.3 WebLCT Main Window ...........................................................................................................3-6
3.4 User Management (Security Management) ..........................................................................3-10
3.4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................3-10
3.4.2 User Access Levels .......................................................................................................3-11
3.4.3 Default User Account.....................................................................................................3-14
3.4.4 User Account .................................................................................................................3-14
3.4.5 Security Management....................................................................................................3-32

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


December, 2011
- ii -/END CONTENTS

3.5 Register NE Configuration ....................................................................................................3-72


3.5.1 Easy Setup Wizard ........................................................................................................3-72
3.5.2 Equipment Setup ...........................................................................................................3-99
4. INITIAL ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 General ...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Adjustment Case.....................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Hot Standby / Twin Path System .....................................................................................4-1
4.2.2 Space Diversity Equipped System...................................................................................4-1
4.2.3 XPIC Equipped System ...................................................................................................4-2
4.2.4 Contiguous or ACCP type BR CKT Equipped System ....................................................4-2
4.3 Adjustment Methods ...............................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 BB RX SW DADE Adjustment .........................................................................................4-2
4.3.2 XPIC DEM DADE Adjustment .........................................................................................4-5
4.3.3 Space Diversity DADE Adjustment ..................................................................................4-8
4.3.4 BR CKT Delay Equalizer Adjustment ............................................................................4-19
5. DETAIL SETUP ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 General ...................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Radio Function Setting............................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.2 Set MODEM Function......................................................................................................5-2
5.2.3 Set MODEM Ports ...........................................................................................................5-2
5.2.4 Set Radio Switch Parameters..........................................................................................5-4
5.2.5 Set TX Power Parameters ...............................................................................................5-7
5.2.6 Set ALM Mode...............................................................................................................5-12
5.2.7 Set XPIC........................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.8 Set AMR ........................................................................................................................5-15
5.3 Set ETH Function..................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.2 Bridge Setting ................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3 ETH Port Setting............................................................................................................5-21
5.3.4 VLAN Setting .................................................................................................................5-24
5.3.5 FDB Setting ...................................................................................................................5-36
5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting ..........................................................................................................5-46
5.3.7 RSTP Setting.................................................................................................................5-70
5.3.8 QoS/Classification Setting .............................................................................................5-75
5.3.9 Other ETH Port Setting................................................................................................5-111
5.3.10 LLF Setting ..................................................................................................................5-114
5.3.11 Broadcast Storm Control Setting .................................................................................5-121
5.4 Configure Crossconnection.................................................................................................5-124
5.4.1 E1 Port Setting ............................................................................................................5-124
5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting ......................................................................................................5-127
5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting.................................................................................................5-134
5.5 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization .........................................................................5-146

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


CONTENTS - iii -

5.5.1 Set Equipment Clock ...................................................................................................5-146


5.5.2 Set EXT Clock .............................................................................................................5-149
5.6 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW ........................................................................5-153
5.6.1 V.11/SC Setting ...........................................................................................................5-153
5.6.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting ...................................................................................5-159
5.6.3 Assign Orderwire Setting .............................................................................................5-161
5.7 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting ...............................................................................................5-165
5.7.1 Correlation Settings .....................................................................................................5-165
5.7.2 AIS Setting...................................................................................................................5-167
5.7.3 BER Threshold Setting ................................................................................................5-168
5.8 Assign PMON/RMON Settings............................................................................................5-173
5.8.1 PMON Threshold Setting.............................................................................................5-173
5.8.2 PMON Other................................................................................................................5-183
5.8.3 RMON Threshold Setting.............................................................................................5-184
5.8.4 RMON Other................................................................................................................5-187
5.9 AUX Setting ........................................................................................................................5-192
5.9.1 AUX Input Setting ........................................................................................................5-192
5.9.2 AUX Output Setting .....................................................................................................5-201
6. OPERATION MONITORING ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 General ...................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................6-1
6.3 View Current Status ................................................................................................................6-1
6.3.1 Display Current Status Window .......................................................................................6-1
6.3.2 Active Alarm Tab .............................................................................................................6-2
6.3.3 Event Log Tab .................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.4 MODEM Tab....................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.5 TRP Tab ..........................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.6 MDP Tab .........................................................................................................................6-8
6.3.7 E1 Tab .............................................................................................................................6-9
6.3.8 STM-1 Tab.....................................................................................................................6-10
6.3.9 GbE Tab ........................................................................................................................6-11
6.3.10 AUX Tab ........................................................................................................................6-12
6.4 Module Front LED, Interface, and Switches..........................................................................6-13
6.4.1 TRP ...............................................................................................................................6-13
6.4.2 SD .................................................................................................................................6-14
6.4.3 TR INTFC ......................................................................................................................6-14
6.4.4 FAN Unit ........................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.5 CON Board ....................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.6 MC-M.............................................................................................................................6-16
6.4.7 TERM-M ........................................................................................................................6-16
6.4.8 MODEM-T .....................................................................................................................6-17
6.4.9 GbE-A............................................................................................................................6-17
6.4.10 STM1-A .........................................................................................................................6-18

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


- iv -/END CONTENTS

6.4.11 16E1-A...........................................................................................................................6-18
6.4.12 AUX/SWO......................................................................................................................6-18
6.4.13 PS-M..............................................................................................................................6-19
6.4.14 FAN-M ...........................................................................................................................6-19
6.5 Alarm Status .........................................................................................................................6-20
6.5.1 Alarm Class ...................................................................................................................6-20
6.5.2 Conditions to Report ......................................................................................................6-21
6.6 Current Metering ...................................................................................................................6-36
6.6.1 Metering Items...............................................................................................................6-36
6.6.2 View Current Metering Setting.......................................................................................6-36
6.7 Performance Monitoring........................................................................................................6-39
6.7.1 PM Parameters..............................................................................................................6-39

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-1

1. LCT SETUP

1.1 General
The 5000iPS Firmware includes the Local Craft Terminal function.

It is designed like as the Web screen on Internet site with LAN connection for
using conveniently. By this policy, it can be accessed by Web browser software
which regularly installed in PC. Therefore, it is named Web LCT, and firstly,
Web browser setting is needed before equipment operation.

1.2 Conventions Used in this Document


Following conventions are used throughout this document:

Style Description Examples


Italic Indicates a related document title/name. Refer to 5000iPS Operation
Manual for details
Bold  Menus and menu items The Overall window appears.
 Indications of parameters and buttons displayed
on the user interface
 Names of items in the computer display
 File names and directory names
-> (arrow) Indicates transition of screens and/or menu items. Select System -> Login/Logout.

< item > A command variable to be entered, which requires < password >
the user’s choice or definition. Commonly used to
prompt the user to enter a password.
Initial Caps Indicates a keypad name using an uppercase for its Press Enter key.
first letter.

1.3 LCT Communication Interface

1.3.1 Communications
The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) is a convenient tool to install and maintain the
equipment. 5000iPS uses the GUI method on WEB browser. In addition, this tool
enables a remote connection.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-2 LCT SETUP

1.3.2 Local Port Interface


The LCT Port is provided on the equipment front:

Figure 1-1 LCT Port

Connect the LAN Port on PC and LCT Port on the equipment front using a LAN Cable.
Following are the specifications of LAN Port/Cable:

 10/100BASE-TX

 RJ45

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-3

1.4 Hardware Requirements

For Windows
Component For Windows XP® For Windows 7®
Vista®
CPU Pentium M 1.6 GHz Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz Intel Core2 Duo 1.6 GHz

RAM 512 MB or greater 1 GB or greater 1 GB or greater

HDD 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater

Display Color LCD (1024 -> 768) Color LCD (1024 -> 768) Color LCD (1024 -> 768)

LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X)

USB Port --- --- ---

1.5 Software Requirements

Item Requirement
Supported Operating System Windows XP® [English Version]

Windows Vista® [English Version]

Windows 7 ® [English Version]

Browsing Software Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8

Microsoft® Internet Explorer 7

Mozilla Firefox™ Version 3.6 or later

1.6 Operating System Environment


Check if your PC satisfies the conditions below:
 Internet Explorer is installed.
 TCP/IP Protocol is properly set.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-4 LCT SETUP

1.6.1 Verify Internet Explorer


Confirm that the Internet Explorer is installed on the PC for LCT. Following are
examples of Windows XP®:

Procedure 1-1 Verify Internet Explorer

1. Click start button, then select:

All Programs -> Internet Explorer [Start menu] or


Programs -> Internet Explorer [Classic Start menu]

This step ends the procedure.

Programs

[Start menu] [Classic Start menu]

Figure 1-2 Windows Start Menu

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-5

1.6.2 Verify TCI/IP Settings


An IP Address of the PC for LCT will be automatically detected at and retrieved
from DHCP Server of the NE.

Procedure 1-2 Set/Verify TCP/P Settings


Set the IP Address that is automatically retrieved:

1. Log on to the Operating System (Windows) as an Administrator.

2. From the start menu of the Windows, select Control Panel. [For the Classic Start
menu, select Settings -> Control Panel.] The Control Panel appears.

3. Double-click the Network Connections icon.

Figure 1-3 Windows Control Panel

The Network Connections option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-6 LCT SETUP

4. Right-click on the Local Area Connection to show the pop-up menu, and select
Properties.

Figure 1-4 Network Connections Option Window

The Local Area Connection Properties option window appears.

5. Click the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to select, and click the Properties button.

Properties button

Figure 1-5 Local Area Connection Properties Option Window

The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-7

6. Verify the following:

Figure 1-6 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Option Window

 Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.


 Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected.

7. When verified, click the OK button. The Local Area Connection Properties option
window appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

9. Close the Network Connections option window when necessary.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-8 LCT SETUP

1.7 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software


Following are the recommended settings for the browsing software (browsers) available to
operate LCT:

1.7.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 8

Procedure 1-3 Set Tabbed Browsing Option


Tabbed Browsing option is recommended.

1. Start up the Internet Explorer 8.

2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Internet Options.

Figure 1-7 Internet Explorer - Tools Menu

The Internet Options appears.

3. On the General tab, click Settings under Tabs option.

Figure 1-8 Internet Option - General

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-9

The Tabbed Browsing Settings option window appears.

4. Select Always open pop-ups in a new tab, then click the OK button.

Figure 1-9 Tabbed Browsing Settings Option Window

Proceed to Procedure 1-4.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-10 LCT SETUP

Procedure 1-4 Set Security Options


1. Click Security tab to open the security options.

2. Click Custom level button.

Figure 1-10 Internet Options — Security

Security Settings — Internet Zone option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


LCT SETUP 1-11

3. Select Enable for Downloads — Automatic prompting for file downloads


option.

Figure 1-11 Internet Options — Security Settings — Internet Zone

4. Click the OK button.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 500 0iPS: OPERATION


1-12/END LCT SETUP

1.7.2 Mozilla Firefox™ Version 3.6.x

Procedure 1-5 Customize Firefox


1. Start up the FireFox.

2. Click the Tools on the menu bar, and select Options.

Figure 1-12 Firefox — Tools Menu

The Options box appears.

3. Select Always ask me where to save files, then click the OK button.

Figure 1-13 Options — General

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


START UP / SHUT DOWN 2-1

2. START UP / SHUT DOWN

2.1 General
Before operating, it is recommended to read carefully SAFETY INFORMATION , and
check all system connections.

2.2 Start Up
The power supply is fed from MDP section to TRP section by signal cables. Therefore, the
following steps are needed to be performed.

The front view of the MDP section that includes MODEM modules and power supply
switches is shown below.

Figure 2-1 Front View of MDP Section

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


2-2 START UP / SHUT DOWN

Procedure 2-1

1. Check that the MODEM - TR INTFC - TRP signal cables are connected correctly.

2. Check that the PWR Switch of MODEM modules are OFF. (to the left position in
below)

Figure 2-2 Turning OFF PWR Switch on MODEM Modules

3. Check that the input voltage from the Station Power Supply is −48 V (tolerable
range; within −40.5 to −57 V) by Digital multimeter.

4. Turn the power supply switch of Station Power Supply to ON.

5. Check that the PWR LED of MODEM module is ON.

6. Turn the PWR Switch of MODEM modules to ON. (to the right position in below).

Figure 2-3 Turning ON PWR Switch on MODEM Modules

7. Confirm that the PWR LED of TR INTFC module is ON.

This step ends the procedure.

2.3 Shut Down


Especially Note that, after turning ON the equipment, you should wait at least 1 minute
before turning OFF.

Repeatedly turning the power ON and OFF within a short interval may cause the failure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


START UP / SHUT DOWN 2-3

Procedure 2-2

1. Turn the PWR Switch of MODEM modules to OFF.

2. Confirm that the PWR LED of TR INTFC modules are OFF.

3. Disconnect the power cable from PS modules of MDP section.

4. Confirm that the PWR indicator of PS modules is OFF.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


2-4/END START UP / SHUT DOWN

This page is intentionally left blank.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SETUP 3-1

3. INITIAL SET UP

Note: Procedures here use the Microsoft® Internet Explorer for the browsing software as an
example.

3.1 General
For using the 5000iPS in the important network, the Web LCT access user level setting is also
very important. After this security management setting, the equipment parameter should be
done for fundamental operation.

3.2 Login, Logout and Exit

3.2.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the network and
network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized modifications, three
levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in Section 3.4.2 User Access Levels)
define users. The available functions to operate depend on the user’s privilege level. Therefore,
some of the functions may or may not be carried out.

The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and network
management system.

Procedure 3-1

1. Power on the computer.

2. Log in to the Windows as the Administrator.

3. Click start, and select Programs  Internet Explore. The Internet Explorer
window appears.

4. In Address field, enter an IP address of the NE with /weblct/ added as shown


below:

 Example: http://172.17.254.253/weblct/

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-2 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-1 Launching Internet Explore


5. Enter a user name and his/her password into User Name and Password fields, then
click the OK button.

Figure 3-2 WebLCT Login Window


Following are the default user name and its password for 5000iPS:

 User Name: Admin

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-3

 Password: 12345678
The main window for WebLCT appears. (See Figure 3-3.)

Figure 3-3 WebLCT Main Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-4 INITIAL SET UP

3.2.2 Log Out from NE


Procedure 3-2

1. Click Logout button in the upper right of WebLCT main window.

Logout button

Figure 3-4 Logout Button on WebLCT Main Window


The Confirmation dialog box appears.

2. Click the OK button to log out.

Figure 3-5 Confirmation Dialog Box

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-5

3. The browser returns to WebLCT Login window.

Figure 3-6 WebLCT Login Window

This step ends the procedure.

3.2.3 Exit WebLCT


Following are the methods to exit WebLCT:

 Select File (F)  Close (X) from Internet Explorer menu bar.

 Click button in the upper right of Internet Explorer window.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-6 INITIAL SET UP

3.3 WebLCT Main Window


Following describes the contents and structure of WebLCT main window:

(1) Logged-In User Name (7) Opposite Site Links


(2) Refresh button
(8) Maintenance button
(3) Auto Mode check box
(4) Hide TRP View check box
(5) hide MDP View check box (9) Logout button

(6) Equipment Status View

(10) Menu Tree (11) Status List

Figure 3-7 WebLCT Main Window Contents

(1) Logged-In User Name [Login User]

This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-7

(2) Refresh button

Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the WebLCT
main window.

(3) Auto Mode check box

Check (click to leave a tick in) Auto Mode check box to enable refreshing the window
automatically.

(4) Hide TRP View check box

Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide TRP View check box to hide the illustrated TRP
status view.

(5) Hide MDP View check box

Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide MDP View check box to hide the illustrated MDP
status view.

(6) Equipment Status View

This field shows the current equipment status.

(7) Opposite Site Links

This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposite sites. A user can select an NE
from the list to log in to.

(8) Maintenance button

Click Maintenance button before starting any maintenance operations.

(9) Logout button

Click Logout button to log out from NE.

(10) Menu Tree

This part shows the menus for the equipment configuration and provisioning by a tree
view. Available operations via WebLCT are:

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-8 INITIAL SET UP

(a) Current Status

Current Status lists current status and event histories of the equipment by each part of
an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, TRP, MDP, AUX).

(b) Easy Setup Wizard

Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to set up the basic equipment configuration
including registering/removing the TRP/MDP Cards. This wizard also provides easier
steps to set up the cross-connections, VLAN service and other necessary configurations
for the new equipment.

(c) Equipment Setup

Select this menu to register or remove TRP and MDP Cards and other relevant
configurations.

(d) Provisioning

Select this menu to configure the detailed settings of TRP and MDP.

(e) Maintenance Control

Maintenance Control executes a protection switch, Loopback, Hardware Reset,


Firmware Reset, etc.

(f) Maintenance Test

Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.

(g) Current/History PMON/RMON Report

Select this menu to retrieve the Current reports or history of Performance Monitor
(PMON) and Remote Network Monitor (RMON). A user can also exports the data to
external storage (local PC, USB Memory, etc.) For more details, refer to the
Maintenance manual.

(h) Metering

Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, TRP power supply and BER.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-9

(i) Equipment Utility

Select this menu to upload and download the equipment configuration data, software,
firmware and FPGA data.

(j) User Account/Security Setting

Select this menu to add, remove and modify user accounts for the equipment, and set up
the security levels for the user accounts.

(k) Inventory

Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software license.

(11) Status List

Click a tab to select a type of status to show its logs.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-10 INITIAL SET UP

3.4 User Management (Security Management)


The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a network system,
and to prevent an unauthorized user from accessing to the network system.

3.4.1 Overview

3.4.1.1 Access Level


5000iPS provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown in the table below.
For details of each access level and its available operations, refer to Table 3-3 User Access
Privilege Levels.

Table 3-1 Access Levels


File SNMP
Component Available Task
Operation Operation
Operator View the equipment configuration and Upload only Obtain
status.
Config In addition to tasks available by Op- Upload Obtain
erator level, manage radio base band Download Set
and switching function.
Admin In addition to tasks available by Config Upload Obtain
level, manage user accounts and time Download Set
adjustments.

NOTES: Following describes the terms, such as "upload" and "download" mentioned in the
table above:

1. Upload is to copy a file from NE to an external storage, such as WebLCT PC.


2. Download is to copy a file from an external storage to the internal storage of
equipment.

3.4.1.2 User Group


User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access level for each
group.

A user of the specified User Group in 5000iPS will be assigned with the pre-defined protocol
and access level of the group. In addition to the three default user groups, up to six user groups
can be added. The default user groups are shown below:

NOTE: Options specified to the default User Groups cannot be modified.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-11

Table 3-2 User Group Profile


Access
Group Name Classification TELNET SSH FTP HTTP SNMP
Level
OPERATOR Unchangeable — — 4 4 4 Operator
CONFIG Unchangeable — — 4 4 4 Config
ADMIN Unchangeable — — 4 4 4 Admin

3.4.2 User Access Levels


Following shows the access level for each task. "Remote" means that a user makes an access to
the equipment remotely.

 Meanings:
R/W: A user can both browse and modify settings.

R: A user can browse the settings.


O: The task is operational by a remote access but is restricted according to the access
level assigned to the user.

Table 3-3 User Access Privilege Levels


WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Easy Setup Wizard
Easy Setup R/W R R O
TRP Setup R/W R R O
MODEM Setup R/W R R O
AMR Setup R/W R R O
Management Setup R/W R R O
TDM Setup R/W R R O
ETH Setup R/W R R O
Equipment Setup
Equipment Configuration R/W R R O
TRP Configuration R/W R R O
Radio Configuration R/W R R O
AMR Configuration R/W R R O
Network Management General Setting R/W R R O
Configuration General Setting (Detail) R/W R R O
Routing Setting R/W R R O
5000S Link Setting R/W R/W R O
IP Access Control Setting R/W R R O
Provisioning
MODEM Function MODEM Port Setting R/W R/W R O

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-12 INITIAL SET UP

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote


Setting Radio Switch Setting R/W R/W R O
TX Power Setting R/W R/W R O
ALM Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
XPIC Setting R/W R/W R O
AMR Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Function Setting Bridge Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Setting R/W R/W R O
FDB Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
RSTP Setting R/W R/W R O
QoS/Classification Setting R/W R/W R O
Other ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
LLF Setting R/W R/W R O
Broadcast Storm Control R/W R/W R O
Setting
E1/STM-1/Cross-Conn Cross Connect Setting R/W R/W R O
ect Setting E1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
STM-1 Port Setting R/W R/W R O
EXT Clock Setting Equipment Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
EXT Clock Setting R/W R/W R O
Relay-Alarm Mapping Relay Control Setting R/W R/W R O
Setting Cluster Alarm Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11/OW Setting V.11/SC Setting R/W R/W R O
V.11 Directional Setting R/W R/W R O
OW Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm/AIS Setting Correlation Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm Severity Setting R/W R/W R O
AIS Setting R/W R/W R O
BER Threshold Setting R/W — R —
PMON/RMON Thresh- PMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
old Setting PMON Other R/W R/W R O
RMON Threshold R/W R/W R O
RMON Other R/W R/W R O
AUX Setting AUX Input Setting R/W R/W R O
AUX Output Setting R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Control
Loopback Control MODEM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 1)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-13

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote


TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(E1 Loopback 2)
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 1)
TDM Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
(STM-1 Loopback 2)
Protection Control MODEM TX/RX Switch R/W R/W R O
Control
RSTP Control R/W R R O
SNCP Switch Control R/W R/W R O
APS Switch Group Control R/W R/W R O
Timing Source Switch R/W R/W R O
Control
MODEM Maintenance Control R/W R/W R O*1
Laser Shutdown Control R/W R/W R O
H/W_F/W Reset H/W Reset Control R/W — — O
Control F/W Reset Control R/W — — O
PMON/RMON/FDB Clear R/W R — O
Offline Maintenance Control R/W R — —
Maintenance Test ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM R/W R R O
Control
Current/History PMON/RMON Report
MODEM PMON Report R R R O
E1 PMON Report R R R O
STM-1 PMON Report R R R O
ETH RMON Report R R R O
VLAN Counter Report R R R O
Metering
Current Metering R/W R/W R O
Equipment Utility
Export (NE -> Storage) Utility R/W R/W — O
Update (Storage -> NE) Utility R/W R/W — O
Program ROM Switching R/W — — O
USB Memory Utility R/W — — O
Shipment R/W — — —
Date/Time Setting R/W R R O
User Account/Security Setting
Login User R — — O
User Account Management R/W — — O
User Group Profile Configuration R/W — — O
Security Management Service Status Setting R/W — — O

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-14 INITIAL SET UP

WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote


Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information R R R R
S/W License Information R R R R
S/W License Information
Import License Key R/W — — O
Radio Capacity Setting R/W R R O
SFP Port License Setting R/W R R O

*1: CW Control is not editable.

3.4.3 Default User Account


5000iPS provides three default user accounts with pre-defined access levels and privileges. In
addition to these default user accounts, up to nine user accounts can be added.

Following describes the pre-defined default user accounts:

Table 3-4 Default User Accounts


User Default User
Description
Name Password Group
User 87654321 User is able to confirm the system configuration OPERATOR
and equipment status, but is not able to make
any changes to the configuration.
Config 87654321 In addition to the tasks available for User, CONFIG
Config user is able to operate the radio
management, base band management,
switching management for C-Plane control
Admin 12345678 In addition to the tasks available for Config, ADMIN
Admin user is able to operate database man-
agement, file management, user management
and time adjustment for M-Plane control.

3.4.4 User Account


Following are the functions to manage user accounts supported by 5000iPS:

 Login User List


Login User List displays the information of registered user accounts. From this list, user
profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles can be modified.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-15

 User Account Management


User Account Management is used to register new user accounts, and to modify/delete
the registered user accounts.

 User Group Profile Configuration


USer Group Profile Configuration is used to register new User Groups, and to
modify/delete the registered User Groups.

3.4.4.1 Login User List


This function allows users to view and confirm the registered user accounts.

Procedure 3-3

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
Login User List. The Login User List appears.

Figure 3-8 Login User List


This step ends the procedure.

3.4.4.2 User Account Management


This function allows users to add registrations of new user accounts, and to modify/delete the
registered user accounts.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-16 INITIAL SET UP

NOTE: The operations regarding this function are available by the Admin-level user(s) only.

 Add User Account


This function is used to register a new user account.

NOTE: In addition to the three default accounts, up to nine user accounts can be added.

 Modify User Account


This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts including
their password and User Group.

 Delete User Account


This function is used to remove registered user accounts.

(1) Add User Accounts

NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to be set to
add new user accounts. Once a registration of a user is completed, the security level
of this user cannot be modified.

Procedure 3-4

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
User Account Management. The User Account Management window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-17

3. Click Add User button.

Add User button

Figure 3-9 User Account Management Window


The User Setting option window appears.

4. Enter the appropriate value to each parameter for the user to be added.

Figure 3-10 User Setting Option Window

i) Enter a User Name within one to 31 characters long.

ii) Click Set Password button on the tool bar to open the Set Password option window,
enter the password within eight to 31 characters long, then click the OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-18 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-11 Set Password Option Window

iii) Select Group Name. See Table 3-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.

iv) Select Security Level:

 Selecting NoAuthNoPriv has no additional settings. Go to Step 5

 Selecting AuthNoPriv enables Auth Algorithm option. Click a radio button to select the
algorithm type, and enter Auth Key. See (a) Setting Authentication Algorithm
below.

 Selecting AuthPriv enables both Auth Algorithm and Priv Algorithm options. Click radio
buttons to select algorithm types, and enter Auth Key and Priv Key. See (a)
Setting Authentication Algorithm and (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.

(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm

1. Select AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv to enable the Auth Algorithm option.

2. Select MD5 or SHA by clicking its radio button.

3. Click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.

4. Enter the Auth Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-19

4.
3.

1.

2.

Figure 3-12 Select AuthNoPriv


Verify the selection and entry.

 To set Priv Algorithm, go to (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.

 To complete the procedure, go to Step 5

(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm

1. Select AuthPriv to enable the Priv Algorithm option.

2. Select DES or AES by clicking its radio button.

3. Click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.

4. Enter the Priv Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-20 INITIAL SET UP

4.
3.

1.

2.

Figure 3-13 Set Privacy Algorithm


Verify the selection and entry, then go to Step 5

5. Click the OK button of the User Setting option window. The Information dialog
box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-14 Information Dialog Box


The User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm the registered user account information.

Figure 3-15 User Account Management Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-21

This step ends the procedure.

Table 3-5 User Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
User Name (text field) Valid value: One to 31 characters long.
Password (read only) Valid value: Eight to 31 characters long. To enter the password, click
Set Password button on the tool bar.
Group Name ADMIN Assign a Group Name for the user to be added. Refer to Table 3 2
CONFIG User Group Profile for User Group.
OPERATOR
GROUP
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting this
option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or AES. Se-
lecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button below.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm for au-
thentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of
original data while transmitting, the original data will be converting the
Hash by comparing them at both ends.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for authenti-
cation and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of original
64
data while transmitting, less than 2 bits of the original data will be con-
verting the Hash of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter the
Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key. The
block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryp-
tion. The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256
bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set Priv
Key button on the tool bar.

(2) Modify User Account

Procedure 3-5

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
User Account Management. The User Account Management window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-22 INITIAL SET UP

3. Click on a User Name of the target user account.

Figure 3-16 User Account Management Window


The User Setting option window appears.

4. Modify the registered value(s):

 To m odify the passwor d, click


Set Password button on the tool
bar to open the Set Pas sword
option window, enter the pass-
word within eight to 31 characters
long, and cli ck the OK button of
the Set Password option window.

 To modify the Group Name, select


an appropriat e Group Na me fro m
Figure 3-17
the Group Name drop-down list.
See Table 3 2 User Group Pro- User Setting Option Window
file for User Groups.

Figure 3-18
Set Password Option Windows

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-23

5. When completed, click OK button of the User Setting option window.

Figure 3-19 User Setting Option Window


The Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-20 Information Dialog Box


User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm the modified user account information.

Figure 3-21 User Account Management Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-24 INITIAL SET UP

(3) Delete User Account

Procedure 3-6

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
User Account Management. The User Account Management window appears.

3. Click Delete User button on the tool bar

Delete User button

Figure 3-22 User Account Management Window


The User Setting option window appears.

4. From User Name drop-down list, select a user account to be removed, and click the
OK button.

Figure 3-23 User Setting (Delete) Option Window


The Confirmation dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-25

5. Confirm the user name to be removed, and click the OK button.

Figure 3-24 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-25 Information Dialog Box


The User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected user account has been removed.

Figure 3-26 User Account Management Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-26 INITIAL SET UP

3.4.4.3 User Group Profile Configuration


This operation registers/modifies User Group Profiles. The privilege of 5000iPS user is the
subject to change according to the user access level and protocols that are assigned by the User
Group Profile. Only the Admin level user(s) is/are available to configure the settings.

 Add User Group Profile


This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User Group
Profiles.
NOTE: In addition to the three default User Group Profiles, up to six User Group Profiles can
be registered.

 Modify User Group Profile


This operation modifies the Access Level and Protocol of the registered User Group
Profile.

 Delete User Group Profile


This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.

(1) Add User Group

Procedure 3-7

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-27

3. Click Add Group button on the tool bar.

Add Group button

Figure 3-27 User Group Profile Configuration Window


The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-28 Group Setting Option Window

Table 3-6 User Group Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Group Name (text field) Valid value: one to 32 characters long.
FTP Allow Select to use FTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use FTP for file transfer.
HTTP Allow Select to use HTTP protocol for WebLCT ac-
cessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTP for WebLCT accessing to the
equipment.
SNMP Allow Select to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Deny Not to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-28 INITIAL SET UP

Parameter Value Description


Access Level Admin Specifies the user access level. See Table 3-3
Config User Access Privilege Levels for each level’s
Operator description.

NOTE: SFTP and HTTPS are not available.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-29 Information Dialog Box


The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the information of newly added User Group Profile is displayed.

Figure 3-30 User Group Profile Configuration Window

This step ends the procedure

(2) Modify User Group

Procedure 3-8

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-29

User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration


window appears.

3. Click on a target Group Name.

Figure 3-31 User Group Profile Configuration Window


The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 3-32 Group Setting Option Window

 Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.

 Select the appropriate Access Level from its drop-down list.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-30 INITIAL SET UP

5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-33 Information Dialog Box


The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed Group Profile information.

Figure 3-34 User Group Profile Configuration Window


This step ends the procedure.

(3) Delete User Group

NOTE: A User Group can be removed only when it has no assigned user account.

Procedure 3-9

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting to select
User Group Profile Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-31

3. Click Delete Group button on the tool bar.

Delete Group button

Figure 3-35 User Group Profile Configuration Window


The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Select a target Group Name to be removed from the drop-down list, and click the
OK button.

Figure 3-36 Group Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Confirm the selected Group Name, and click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-37 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-32 INITIAL SET UP

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-38 Information Dialog Box


The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the target group name has been removed.

Figure 3-39 User Group Profile Configuration Window


This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5 Security Management

3.4.5.1 Overview
5000iPS supports the following protocols and security management functions:

(1) SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1)

SNMPv1 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, which is


specified by the following RFCs:

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-33

Table 3-7 RFC Standards


RFC No. Title
RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information on
TCP/IP-based Internets (SMIv1)
RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 1213 Management Information Base on Network Management of
TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II

5000iPS enables SNMPv1 to support the following functions:


 GET/SET of MIB
Following are response to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1.

Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,


security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT.

By default, 5000iPS uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use the
other than the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.

Table 3-8 PDU Supported by SNMPv1


Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance
value in the list.
GetResponse Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and Set Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
Trap Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).

 Send Trap
5000iPS can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for sending the
trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one additional destination.
A user can also specify the community name and UDP Port.

 User Application (Log)


5000iPS records the names of logged-in users in the log file.

(2) SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c)

SNMPv2c is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is a


revised version of SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are that the GetBulk, the

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-34 INITIAL SET UP

inform request, unified packet format of each PDU are added, conforming to SMIv2 and
following RFCs:

Table 3-9 RFC Standards

RFC No. Title


SNMPv2c
RFC 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP)
RFC 3428 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Inter-
net-standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2

5000iPS enables SNMPv2c to support the following functions:

 GET/SET of MIB
5000iPS responds to the request of the network management system.

Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,


security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.

By default, 5000iPS uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use other
than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.

Table 3-10 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c


Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-35

 Send Trap
5000iPS can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port 162. Except
for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one
additional destination. User can also specify the community name and UDP Port.

 User Application (Log)


5000iPS records the logged-in user name in the log file.

(3) SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3)

SNMPv3 is a communication protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is the


newest version of SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and v3 are that the user
authentication, ciphered communication, and the change-packet format are enhanced,
conforming to the following RFCs for SMIv2 that define SNMPv3, SNMPv2c:

Table 3-11 RFC Standards


RFC No. Title
SNMPv3
RFC 3411 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) Management Frameworks
RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3413 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications
RFC 3414 User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv3)
RFC 3415 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Man-
agement Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Inter-
net-standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-36 INITIAL SET UP

5000iPS provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:

 GET/SET of MIB.
Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) corresponding to SNMPv3.

Table 3-12 PDU Supported by SNMPv3


Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
Report Returns a packet if the reportableFlag is set to on.

 Send Trap
5000iPS can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP Port 162.

IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the Trap.
Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv.

Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required when the security level is
authPriv.

 Security (user authentication, session management and encryption)


SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by the user
name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.

User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP request is
authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the password is selectable
between MD5 and SHA.

Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security level of
the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable between DES and
AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set when registering users.

User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte long

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-37

and unique within the network.

(4) NTP (Network Time Protocol)

This protocol synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated clients in a network, which
is specified by the following RFCs:

Table 3-13 RFC Standards


RFC No. Title
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and
Analysis
RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS

5000iPS can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the available functions of
NTP Client and Server:

 As NTP Client
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request to
obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock according
to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered via WebLCT.

When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to the
broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first received
valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if exist.

If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization among
the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the current time of
the equipment.

 As NTP Server
When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the current
time information to the Client.

When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.

(5) FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

This protocol transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the following RFCs.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-38 INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-14 RFC Standards


RFC No. Title
RFC 959 Original FTP spec.
RFC 1123 The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959
RFC 2228 FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset needed to
support TLS / SSL connections)
RFC 2389 Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands
RFC 2428 Essentially IPv6 support

Using 5000iPS as FTP Server provides the following functions:

 Data Upload and Download Service


Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is restricted,
which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege (refer to 3.4.2 User
Access Levels).

Files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as the file
names and types, which will be downloaded.

 Session Management
Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.

The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20 can be
changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number is selected by
the equipment automatically.

If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP session will
be disconnected automatically.

 User Authentication Function


5000iPS supports three types of the authentications:

 External RADIUS Server with internal authentication

 External LDAP Server with internal authentication

 Internal authentication only

(6) HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)

HTTP is the protocol for transferring data between Web server and client (WebLCT).

The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-39

Table 3-15 RFC Standards


RFC No. Title
RFC 1945 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0
RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1

Using 5000iPS as HTTP server enables the following functions:

 WebLCT
WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.

 Session Management
Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.

The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using WebLCT.

 User Authentication Function


5000iPS supports the internal authentication only.

3.4.5.2 Service Status Setting


Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:

Procedure 3-10

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.

3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-40 INITIAL SET UP

4. Confirm the status of each Server:

Figure 3-40 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-41

Figure 3-41 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

Figure 3-42 Service Status Indication

Table 3-16 Service Status Indication


Status Description
Running Protocol/Service is enabled.
Stopped Protocol/Service is disabled.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-42 INITIAL SET UP

3.4.5.3 SNMP
Procedure 3-11

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand Security Management under the User Account / Security Setting.

3. From the Security Management options, select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

4. Click SNMP:

SNMP

Figure 3-43 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP)


The SNMP Setting option window appears.

5. Specify an appropriate value to each parameter.

Figure 3-44 SNMP Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-43

Table 3-17 SNMP Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description


SNMPv1/v2c Enable Enables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Stopped)
SNMPv3 Enable Enables SNMPv3 (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv3 (Stopped)
UDP Port 1 to 65535 From 1 to 65535 are available for UDP Port No.
161 161 is the default UDP Port No.

CAUTION:
In order to apply the values properly, CPU must be rebooted
when UDP Port Number(s) is/are changed.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-45 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm the displayed SNMP information.

Figure 3-46 Service Status Setting Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-44 INITIAL SET UP

This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5.4 SNMP Community


This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only the
registered SNMP managers have the right to access the equipment. Up to ten servers can be
registered.

(1) Registration of SNMP Community

Procedure 3-12

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click a Community No. to add.

SNMP Community numbers

Figure 3-47 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)


The SNMP Community option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-45

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-48 SNMP Community Option Window

Table 3-18 SNMP Community Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value:
one to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 3-3
Config User Access Privilege Levels for details.
Operator
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of
the SNMP Manager(s).
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).

5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-49 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-46 INITIAL SET UP

7. Confirm that the newly added SNMP Community information is displayed.

Figure 3-50 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)


This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify SNMP Community

Procedure 3-13

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click Community No. of the SNMP Community field.

SNMP Community numbers

Figure 3-51 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-47

The SNMP Community option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 3-52 SNMP Community Option Window (Modify)

Table 3-19 SNMP Community Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value:
one to 31 characters long. A request with a different
Community Name will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 3-3
Config User Access Privilege Levels for details.
Operator
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of
the SNMP Manager(s).
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-53 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-48 INITIAL SET UP

7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Community information is displayed.

Figure 3-54 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)


This step ends the procedure.

(3) Delete SNMP Community

Procedure 3-14

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click Delete SNMP Community button on the tool bar.

Delete SNMP Community button

Figure 3-55 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-49

The Delete SNMP Community option window appears.

4. Select an SNMP Community No. from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.

Figure 3-56 Delete SNMP Community Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button when confirmed.

Figure 3-57 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-58 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-50 INITIAL SET UP

7. Confirm that the selected SNMP Community information has been removed.

Figure 3-59 Service Status Setting Window (SNCP Community)


This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5.5 SNMP Trap Entry


This option configures the SNMP Trap:

(1) SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 3-15

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-51

3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.

SNMP Trap Entry No.

Figure 3-60 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value for each parameter:

(a) SNMPv1

Figure 3-61 SNMPv1 Trap Entry Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-52 INITIAL SET UP

(b) SNMPv2c

Figure 3-62 SNMPv2c Trap Entry Option Window

(c) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Trap)

Figure 3-63 SNMPv3 (Trap) Entry Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-53

(d) SNMPv3 (PDU Type: Inform)

Figure 3-64 SNMPv3 (Inform) Entry Option Window

Table 3-20 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters


Parameter Value Description
SNMP Version SNMPv1 Set SNMP Version for Trap.
SNMPv2c
SNMPv3
PDU Type Trap Available for all SNMP Versions.
Inform SNMPv1 cannot select Inform.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.
UDP Port 1 to 65535 Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]
Community Name (text field) Enter Community Name of the Trap within one to 31
characters long. This Community Name must be the
same on both SNMP Server and Agent.
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and
encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log
in. Selecting this option enables Auth Algorithm radio
button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted
by DES or AES. Selecting this option enables Priv
Algorithm radio button below.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-54 INITIAL SET UP

Parameter Value Description


SNMP Engine ID (text field) Assign a 16 byte value to an NE, which must be
unique within the same managed network.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the
Hash Algorithm for authentication and digital signa-
ture. In order to detect the falsification of original data
while transmitting, the Hash is generated using the
original data, which is compared at both ends of
communication path.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash
Algorithm for authentication and digital signature. In
order to detect the falsification of original data while
transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is generated using the
64
original data that is less than 2 bits which is com-
pared at both ends of communication paths.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public
key. To enter the Authentication Key, click Set Auth
Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit en-
cryption key. The block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is
SPN-Structured block encryption. The block size is
128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256
bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy
Key, click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar.

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-65 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
newly added SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-55

Figure 3-66 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 3-16

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.

SNMP Trap entry No.

Figure 3-67 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

4. Modify parameters by referring to Table 3-20 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters:

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-56 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-68 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window


5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-69 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the modified SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

Figure 3-70 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-57

(3) Delete SNMP Trap Entry

Procedure 3-17

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click Delete SNMP Trap Entry button on the tool bar.

Delete SNMP Trap Entry button

Figure 3-71 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

4. From the drop-down list, select the No. of SNMP Trap Entry to be removed, and
click the OK button.

Figure 3-72 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-58 INITIAL SET UP

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-73 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-74 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected SNMP Trap Entry information has been removed from the
display.

Figure 3-75 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)


This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5.6 NTP
Procedure 3-18

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-59

3. Click NTP.

NTP

Figure 3-76 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)

The NTP Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-77 NTP Setting Option Window

Table 3-21 NTP Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
NTP Enable Enable/Disable the NTP Protocol on the equipment.
Disable
NTP Server Mode Multicast Specify the NTP Server mode.
Unicast
Disabled
NTP Client Mode Multicast Specify NTP Client mode.
Unicast
Disabled

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-60 INITIAL SET UP

Parameter Value Description


Stratum 2 to 15 Set Stratum level of the NTP Time Packets. The
lowest Stratum should be received in NTP PDU plus
1.
Multicast Port Bridge1 Select a port to output the Multicast Time informa-
Bridge2 tion.
NE2
Multicast Interval 16 to 131072s Select Multicast Interval. [unit: second]

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-78 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed NTP configuration.

Figure 3-79 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-61

Figure 3-80 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5.7 NTP Server Address


This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its information.

(1) Register NTP Server Address

Procedure 3-19

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.

No. of NTP Servers

Figure 3-81 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-62 INITIAL SET UP

The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-82 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

Table 3-22 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the upper NTP Server.
NTP Version 3 Specify the NTP massage version.
4
Poll Time 16 to 131072 Set the interval for polling NTP Server. [unit: second
(one hour); default: 3600 sec]

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-83 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-63

7. Confirm that the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 3-84 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)


This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify NTP Server Address

Procedure 3-20

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.

No. of NTP Servers

Figure 3-85 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-64 INITIAL SET UP

The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter. Modify parameters:

Figure 3-86 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window


5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-87 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the modified NTP Server Address information is displayed.

Figure 3-88 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-65

This step ends the procedure.

(3) Clear NTP Server Address

Procedure 3-21

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click Clear NTP Server button on the tool bar.

Clear NTP Server button

Figure 3-89 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)


The Clear NTP Server option window appears.

4. From No. drop-down list, select the number of target NTP Server Address, and the
click the OK button:

Figure 3-90 Clear NTP Server Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-66 INITIAL SET UP

Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-91 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-92 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected NTP Server Address information has been removed.

Figure 3-93 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-67

3.4.5.8 FTP
Procedure 3-22

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

3. Click FTP.

FTP

Figure 3-94 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)


The FTP Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-95 FTP Setting Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-68 INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-23 FTP Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
FTP Always Enable FTP is always in service.
Enable Enable FTP service.
Disable Disable FTP service.
TCP Port (Command) 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for incoming commands).
[default: 21]
TCP Port (Data) 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for outgoing commands)
[default: 20]
MAX Session 1 to 3 Specify the maximum number of user sessions at a time
Auto Stop Enable Enable FTP Server to disconnect a session automatically
if a session has no operation for 90 seconds.
Disable Disable FTP Server to disconnect a session automatically
if a session has no operation.

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-96 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-69

7. Confirm the displayed FTP information:

Figure 3-97 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 3-98 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)


This step ends the procedure.

3.4.5.9 HTTP
Procedure 3-23

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand User Account / Security Setting, then
expand its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-70 INITIAL SET UP

3. Click HTTP.

HTTP

Figure 3-99 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)


The HTTP Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-100 HTTP Setting Option Window

Table 3-24 HTTP Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
HTTP Enable (Running) Enable FTTP service.
Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTP Server. [default: 80]

5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-71

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-101 Information Dialog Box


The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed HTTP information:

Figure 3-102 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)

Figure 3-103 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-72 INITIAL SET UP

3.5 Register NE Configuration

3.5.1 Easy Setup Wizard


The Easy Setup Wizard navigates a user to make a faster and easier way of provisioning the
equipment, which is available at initially powering on.

The Easy Setup Wizard supports the following operations:

 Easy Setup
Settings of NE Name, Switch Group (System structure) and guide to other setups.

 TRP Setup
Settings for cooling FAN usage, TRP usage, SD usage, and SD IF Combiner.

 MODEM Setup
Settings for Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, and RF Frequency regarding
Radio.

 AMR Setup
Settings for AMR range and E1 and STM-1 mapping, and ETH bandwidth.

 Management Setup
Settings for IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway for NE.

 TDM Setup
Setting of TDM cross-connect.

 ETH Setup
Settings of VLAN service.

3.5.1.1 Easy Setup


The Easy Setup is a wizard that navigates a user to set up the basic configurations, such as 1 +
0, 1 + 1 Hot Standby, 1 + 1 Twin Path and 1 + 0 XPIC, following the appropriate sequences.

Procedure 3-24

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Easy Setup.
The Easy Setup window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-73

3. Click Setup button.

Setup button

Figure 3-104 Easy Setup Window


The Easy Setup — Step1 window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-74 INITIAL SET UP

4. Enter the equipment name, then click the Next button.

enter equipment name

Next button

Figure 3-105 Easy Setup — Step1 Window


The Easy Setup – Step2 window appears.

NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for a user to
edit the configuration.

Table 3-25 Easy Setup — Step1 Parameter


Parameter Value/Description
Equipment Name 1 to 32 characters long.

5. Enter the appropriate card name to each Card Slot, then click the Next button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-75

 Clicking the Auto Detect button detects the mounted cards to fill in the blank
slots automatically.

Card Slots Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 3-106 Easy Setup — Step2 Window


The Easy Setup — Step3 window appears.

6. Register the configuration type:

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-76 INITIAL SET UP

Switch Group Configuration

Next button

Figure 3-107 Easy Setup — Step3 Window (Example: 1+1 Hot Standby)

 For 1 + 0 System (No Protection), check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 from its drop-down list.

 For 1 + 1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP , then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down
list.

 For 1 + 1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.

 For 1 + 0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-77

7. When completed, click the Next button. The Easy Setup – Step4 window appears.

8. The Easy Setup — Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values of parameters, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 3-108 Easy Setup — Step4 Window (example: 1+1 Hot Standby)
The Warning dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-109 Warning Dialog Box


While in the process, Easy Setup indicator appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-78 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-110 Easy Setup (Under execution...) Indicator


10. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.

Figure 3-111 Information Dialog Box


TRP Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.2. TRP Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

3.5.1.2 TRP Setup


Procedure 3-25

Launch the TRP Setup wizard if it is not displayed:

i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.

ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select TRP Setup. The
TRP Setup window appears. Click the Setup button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-79

Setup button

Figure 3-112 TRP Setup Window


1. TRP Setup — Step1 Setting of Cooling window appears. Set the usage of Cooling
FAN.

Select Used or Not Used.

Figure 3-113 TRP Setup — Step1 Window


Click Next button. The TRP Setup — Step2 Setting of TRP and SD window
appears.

2. Set MDP MODM No., TRP Usage, and SD Usage.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-80 INITIAL SET UP

Set values

Figure 3-114 TRP Setup — Step 2 Window

Table 3-26 TRP Setup Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Cooling FAN Used Select to mount FAN UNIT.
Not Used Select not to mount FAN UNIT.
MDP MODEM No. Open Select not to connect MODEM to applicable TRP Lo-
cation No.
Slot01 to Slot08, Select MODEM mounting Slot No. which connected
Slot11 to Slot12 to applicable TRP Location No.
TRP Usage (read only) The Used status is automatically shown by above
MODEM setting.
SD Usage Used Select to mount SD.
Not Used Select not to mount SD. When redundancy system,
No.2 channel status is automatically shown as same
as No.1 channel setting.
SD IF Combiner Linear Adder Select Linear Adder mode
Ratio Square Select Ratio Square mode

NOTE: When use SD with the Linear Adder mode and the AMR function, the AMR Switch
condition is recommended to set as CNR mode in [Provisioning - MODEM Function
Setting - AMR Setting] menu.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-81

When completed, click the Next button. TRP Setup — Step3 window appears.

Set values

Figure 3-115 TRP Setup — Step3 Window


3. Select Linear Adder mode or Radio Square mode at the SD IF Combiner radio
button.

4. When completed, clickk the Next button. TRP Setup — Step4 Setting
Confirmation Screen window appears.

5. The TRP Setup — Step4 Setting Confirmation Screen window indicates the
modified parameters in blue fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-82 INITIAL SET UP

OK button

Figure 3-116 TRP Setup — Step4 Window


Information dialog box appears.

Figure 3-117 Information Dialog Box


6. Click the OK button to proceed.
MODEM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.3 MODEM Setup.
This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-83

3.5.1.3 MODEM Setup


Procedure 3-26

Launch the MODEM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:

i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.

ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select MODEM Setup.
The MODEM Setup window appears.

1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Set values

Figure 3-118 MODEM Setup — Step1 Window (Example: 1+0 System)

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-84 INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-27 FTP Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Channel Spacing 28MHz Select in case of 28/29/29.65/30MHz Spacing.
40MHz Select in case of 40MHz Spacing.
Reference Modulation 64 QAM Select a reference modulation from the list.
128 QAM
256 QAM
E1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 152 Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The
number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulation.
STM-1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 2 Specify the number of STM-1 Channels for mapping.
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) The value is automatically calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the frequency at output.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the frequency at input.
Frame ID 1 to 32 When XPIC is not equipped, set from 1 to 32.
When XPIC is equipped, set from following value;
- Master side: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,11,13,15
- Slave side: 17,19,21,23,25,27,29,31
TX Power Control ATPC Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control.
MTPC Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.

NOTES: Following describes the terms, such as "upload" and "download" mentioned in the
table above:

1. When completed, click the Next button. MODEM Setup — Step2 window appears.

2. The MODEM Setup — Step2 window indicates the modified parameters in the blue
fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-85

OK button

Figure 3-119 MODEM Setup — Step2 Window (Example: 1+0 System)

Information dialog box appears.

3. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-120 Information Dialog Box


Management Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.5 Management Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

3.5.1.4 AMR Setup


Procedure 3-27

1. After the MODEM Setup wizard is completed, the AMR Setup window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-86 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-121 AMR Setting Window


2. Click Setup button. AMR Setup >> Step1 AMR Operation window appears. Click
AMR Mode radio button.

Figure 3-122 AMR Setup — Step1 Window


3. Specify AMR range by clicking the proper radio buttons for reference modulation

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-87

(64QAM to 256QAM, Used). Click Next button.

Table 3-28 AMR Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
Non Operation Disable AMR function
AMR Range 64QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)
128QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)
256QAM Data transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)

4. ARM Setup — Step2 E1 / STM-1 Mapping window appears. Specify E1 (and/or


STM-1) mapping

Figure 3-123 ARM Setup — Step2 Window


5. Click Next button when completed.

6. ARM Setup — Step3 window appears. Confirm that the fields of modified
parameters change to blue, and then click OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-88 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-124 AMR Setup — Step3 Window


7. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 3-125 Information Dialog Box


Management Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.5 Management Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

3.5.1.5 Management Setup


NOTE: If Warning dialog box appears, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar,
to put the service into the Maintenance Mode.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-89

Maintenance button

Figure 3-126 WebLCT Main Window (Maintenance Button)


Procedure 3-28

Launch the Management Setup option window if it is not displayed:

i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.

ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select Management
Setup. The Management Setup option window appears.

1. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-127 Management Setup Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-90 INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-29 Management Setup Parameters


Parameter Value Description
IP Address Setting (Bridge1)
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the NMS Port.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Default Gateway IP Address.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Use NMS Port (for root NE only).
No Not to use NMS Port.

2. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.

3. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-128 Warning Dialog Box


The Management Setup option window updates the information.

4. Click the OK button to proceed.

OK button

Figure 3-129 Management Setup Option Window

TDM Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.6 TDM Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-91

3.5.1.6 TDM Setup


Procedure 3-29

Launch the TDM Setup wizard if it is not displayed:

i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.

ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select TDM Setup. The
TDM Setup window appears.

1. Click the Add More XC button on the tool bar.

Add More XC button

Figure 3-130 TDM Setup Window


The TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) option window appears.

2. Enter the Service Name, and specify the appropriate value to each parameter.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-92 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-131 TDM Setup (TDM XC Configuration) Option Window


3. When completed, click the OK button. TDM Setup (TDM XC Service
Configuration List) window appears.

4. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-132 TDM Setup (TDM XC Service Configuration List) Window


Warning dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-93

Figure 3-133 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-134 Information Dialog Box


NOTE: Change E1 Port usage to enable the E1 interface.

ETH Setup wizard is launched. Proceed to 3.5.1.7 ETH Setup.

This step ends the procedure.

3.5.1.7 ETH Setup


Procedure 3-30

Launch the ETH Setup wizard if it is not displayed:

i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.

ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Easy Setup Wizard to select ETH Setup. The
ETH Setup (E-Line Service Configuration) window appears.

1. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the Next button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-94 INITIAL SET UP

Next button

Figure 3-135 ETH Setup (E-Line Service Configuration) Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-95

Table 3-30 E-Line Service Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Service Type EPL EPL (Ethernet Private Line) is a data service defined by
the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a point-to-point
Ethernet connection between a pair of dedicated
User-Network Interfaces (UNIs), with a high degree of
transparency.
EPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
with an expectation of low frame delay, frame delay
variation and frame loss ratio. EPL is implemented as a
point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC), which,
unlike Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL), does not
allow for Service Multiplexing, i.e., a dedicated UNI
(physical interface) is used to accept all service frames
and to map them to a single EVC (a.k.a. All-to-one bun-
dling).
Due to a high degree of transparency, EPL is often used
to provide point-to-point Transparent LAN Service (TLS),
where the Service Frame’s header and payload are
identical at both the source and destination UNI. EPL is
not fully transparent, as it must filter IEEE 802.3x Pause
frames.
EVPL EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) is a data service
defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum, providing a
point-to-point Ethernet connection between a pair of
User-Network Interfaces (UNIs).
EVPL service is specified using an E-Line service type,
very similar to a Ethernet Private Line (EPL) service, via
a point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC).
However, unlike EPL, EVPL allows for Service Multi-
plexing, i.e., multiple EVCs or Ethernet services per UNI.
Other difference between the EVPL and EPL is the de-
gree of transparency - while EPL is highly transparent,
filtering only the Pause frames, EVPL is required to ei-
ther peer or drop most of the Layer 2 Control Protocols.

The ETH Setup (E-LAN Service Configuration) window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-96 INITIAL SET UP

2. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter, and then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 3-136 ETH Setup (E-LAN Service Configuration) Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-97

Table 3-31 E-LAN Service Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Specify an ID of VLAN.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter the service name of VLAN. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters
long.
Service Type EP-LAN EP-LAN (Ethernet Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet service type
defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), multiple locations can be in-
terconnected using an EPLAN service. However, each location
can be a member of one and only one EVC. If a given location
requires connection to a second EVC, it will require the second
UNI.
Because there is only one EVC per UNI, the EVC cannot be seen
by the customer (e.g., an 802.1p VLAN tag is invisible).
EVP-LAN EVP-LAN (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) is a Metro Ethernet ser-
vice type defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum.
Because E-LAN services implement the multipoint-to-multipoint
Ethernet virtual connections (EVC), this service provides Metro
Ethernet with a multipoint service that can support multiple over-
lapping closed-user groups. For example, a district school system
with elementary, middle, and high schools could put on of the high
schools on one EVC, all of the middle schools on a second EVC,
and all of the elementary schools on a third EVC, using EPLAN
services at each school. The district data center and administra-
tive offices could have EVPLAN service and be made a member
of all three EVCs without the need for three UNIs.
Because there are multiple EVCs per UNI in an EVPLAN service,
the EVCs must be visible to the customer. To do this, the service
provider expects customer traffic to have an appropriate 802.1p
VLAN tag when submitted. The network will also deliver tagged
traffic to that location so that the customer knows which EVC traf-
fic is arriving from.

Warning dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-98 INITIAL SET UP

3. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-137 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

4. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-138 Information Dialog Box


The ETH Setup window appears.

Figure 3-139 ETH Setup Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-99

3.5.2 Equipment Setup


The Equipment Setup allows more detailed settings than those done by the Easy Setup Wizard.
Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.

 Equipment Configuration
Specifies NE Name, Switch Group (1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby, 1+1 Twin Path).

 TRP Configuration
Specifies cooling FAN usage, TRP usage, SD usage, and SD IF Combiner.

 Radio Configuration
Specifies Channel Spacing, Mode, E1/STM-1 Mapping, RF Frequency for Radio.

 AMR Configuration
Specifies the mode type and range for AMR.

 Network Management Configuration


Specifies an IP Address of each port and functions.

3.5.2.1 Equipment Configuration


Procedure 3-31

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration. The Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration window
appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-100 INITIAL SET UP

3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-140 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window


Equipment Configuration — Step1 window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-101

4. Enter the equipment name to Equipment Name field, then click the Next button.

Equipment Name

Next button

Figure 3-141 Equipment Configuration — Step1 Window


NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for a user to
edit the configuration.

Table 3-32 Equipment Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Equipment Name (text field) Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.

Equipment Configuration — Step2 window appears.

5. Select to fill in a card name for each slot.

 Clicking the Auto Detect button retrieves names of cards that are currently
mounted.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-102 INITIAL SET UP

Auto Detect button

Next button

Figure 3-142 Equipment Configuration — Step2 Window

6. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration — Step3


window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-103

7. Using drop-down lists in MODME / STM SW / XPIC GRP Configuration option


box, select the configuration type:

Switch Groups

Next button

Figure 3-143 Equipment Configuration — Step3 Window (Selecting 1+1 Twin Path)

 For 1 + 0 System (No Protection), check (click to leave a tick in) a check box
of the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 from its drop-down list.

 For 1 + 1 Hot Standby System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP , then select 1+1 Hot Standby from its drop-down
list.

 For 1 + 1 Twin Path System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of
the target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+1 Twin Path from its drop-down list.

 For 1 + 0 XPIC System, check (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the
target SW/XPIC GRP, then select 1+0 XPIC from its drop-down list.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-104 INITIAL SET UP

8. When completed, click the Next button. Equipment Configuration — Step4


window appears.

9. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK button.

OK button

Figure 3-144 Equipment Configuration — Step4 Window (Example: 1+1 Twin Path)
10. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-145 Warning Dialog Box


Easy Setup indicator appears while in progress.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-105

Figure 3-146 Easy Setup Indicator


11. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.

Figure 3-147 Information Dialog Box

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-106 INITIAL SET UP

12. The Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration window updates the


information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.

Figure 3-148 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window (Example)

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-107

3.5.2.2 TRP Configuration


1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select TRP
Configuration. The Figure Equipment Setup — TRP Configuration window
appears.

3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-149 Equipment Setup — TRP Configuration Window


TRP Configuration — Step1 window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-108 INITIAL SET UP

4. Select the Cooling FAN usage. Then click the Next button.

Select Cooling FAN

Figure 3-150 TRP Configuration — Step1 Window


Click Next button. The TRP Configuration — Step2 window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-109

5. Set MDP MODEM No., TRP Usage, and SD Usage.

Set values.

Figure 3-151 TRP Configuration — Step2 Window

Table 3-33 TRP Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Cooling FAN Used Select to mount FAN UNIT.
Not Used Select not to mount FAN UNIT.
MDP MODEM No. Open Select not to connect MODEM to applicable TRP Lo-
cation No.
Slot01 to Slot08, Select MODEM mounting Slot No. which connected
Slot11 to Slot12 to applicable TRP Location No.
TRP Usage (read only) The Used status is automatically shown by above
MODEM setting.
SD Usage Used Select to mount SD.
Not Used Select not to mount SD. When redundancy system,
No.2 channel status is automatically shown as same
as No.1 channel setting.
SD IF Combiner Linear Adder Select Linear Adder mode
Ratio Square Select Ratio Square mode

NOTES: When use SD with the Linear Adder mode and the AMR function, the AMR Switch
condition is recommended to set as CNR mode in [Provisioning - MODEM Function
Setting - AMR Setting] menu.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-110 INITIAL SET UP

6. When completed, click the Next button. TRP Configuration – Step 3 window
appears.

Select

Figure 3-152 TRP Configuration — Step 3 Window


7. Select Linear Adder mode or Radio Square mode at the SD IF Combiner radio
button.

8. When completed, click the Next button. TRP Configuration — Step4 Setting
Confirmation Screen window appears.

9. The TRP Configuration — Step4 window indicates the modified parameters in


blue fields. Confirm the values, then click the OK button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-111

Figure 3-153 TRP Configuration — Step4 Window


Information dialog box appears.

Figure 3-154 Information Dialog Box


10. Click the OK button. The Equipment Setup — TRP Configuration window
appears.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-112 INITIAL SET UP

3.5.2.3 Radio Configuration


Procedure 3-32

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio
Configuration. The Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration window appears.

3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup buttton

Figure 3-155 Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration Window (Example)


Radio Configuration — Step1 window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-113

4. Specify parameters in New Setting option box:

New Setting

Next button

Figure 3-156 Radio Configuration — Step1 Window (Example: 1+1 Hot Standby)

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-114 INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-34 Radio Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Channel Spacing 28MHz Select in case of 28/29/29.65/30MHz Spacing.
40MHz Select in case of 40MHz Spacing.
Reference Modulation 64QAM Select a reference modulation from the list.
128QAM
256QAM
E1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 152 Specify the number of E1 Channels for mapping. The
number of channels must not exceed the limitation of the
specified modulations.
STM-1 Mapping [CH] 0 to 2 Set the STM-1 Channel to specify the frequency func-
tion.
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) Indicates the Ethernet bandwidth value that is automati-
cally calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the RF Frequency at output.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] Set the RF Frequency at input.
Frame ID 1 to 32 When XPIC is not equipped, set from 1 to 32.
When XPIC is equipped, set from following value;
- Master side: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,11,13,15
- Slave side: 17,19,21,23,25,27,29,31.
TX Power Control ATPC Selects Automatic Transmitter Power Control
MTPC Selects Manual Transmitter Power Control.

NOTES: Following describes the terms, such as "upload" and "download" mentioned in the
table above:

5. When completed, click the Next button. Radio Configuration — Step2 window
appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-115

6. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK button.

Figure 3-157 Radio Configuration — Step2 Window (Example)


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-158 Information Dialog Box


8. The AMR Configuration wizard appears. Proceed to the next sub section.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-116 INITIAL SET UP

3.5.2.4 AMR Configuration


Procedure 3-33

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select AMR
Configuration. The Equipment Setup — AMR Configuration window appears.

3. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-159 Equipment Setup — AMR Configuration Window


AMR Configuration — Step1 window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-117

4. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:

Figure 3-160 AMR Configuration — Step1 Window

 Click AMR Mode radio button to enable the options.

 Select other modulations to be used during AMR operation by clicking


its/their Used radio button(s).

Table 3-35 AMR Configuration Parameters


Parameter Value Description
AMR Operation AMR Mode Enable AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
Non Operation Disable AMR function.
AMR Range 64QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 64 values (6 bits)
128QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 128 values (7 bits)
256QAM Data Transmission for 1 time is 256 values (8 bits)

NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is specified
by the Radio Configuration.

5. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration — Step2 window
appears.

6. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-118 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-161 AMR Configuration — Step2 Window

 Enter priorities to modulations under the E1 Mapping for the use during the
AMR operation.

 For the STM-1 Through mode, select a modulation scheme to be used during
AMR operation, and enter the available radio capacity. The remaining capac-
ity of Ethernet Bandwidth is calculated automatically.

Table 3-36 E1 Mapping Parameters


Parameter Value Description
E1 Mapping 64QAM Select following items:
128QAM E1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 152]
256QAM STM-1 Mapping [Range: 0 to 2]
— ETH Bandwidth is calculated from E1 and STM-1 Map-
pings.

7. When completed, click the Next button. AMR Configuration — Step3 window
appears.

8. Confirm that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click the
OK button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-119

Figure 3-162 AMR Configuration — Step3 Window


Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-163 Information Dialog Box


AMR Configuration window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-120 INITIAL SET UP

10. Confirm that all parameters are set.

Figure 3-164 AMR Configuration Window


This step ends the procedure.

3.5.2.5 Network Management Configuration


This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters of NEs
to be managed by the network management system.

 General Setting
In order to connect the 5000iPS to NMS, execute the setting to use or not to use the
NMS Port, and assign the IP Address.

 General Setting (Detail)


Setting for IP Address of each internal port (NE2, Inband Management VLAN) and NE
Branch (NMS/NE/MODEM)

 Routing Setting
Configure the static route information.

 IP Access Control Setting


This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-121

interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the interfaces except Bridge, LCT Port, NE2
Port and Inband Management VLAN.

 5000S Link Setting


This setting is used for indicating the 5000S / IP Hybrid Configuration (2 NEs in single
Rack) as single NE in network management system.

(1) General Setting

Procedure 3-34

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting. The General Setting window appears.

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-165 General Setting Window


General Setting option window appears.

5. Specify parameters:

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-122 INITIAL SET UP

Figure 3-166 General Setting Option Window

Table 3-37 General Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
IP Address Setting (Bridge1)
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of NMS Port.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Subnet Mask of NMS Port.
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of Default Gate-
way.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Use NMS Port.
No Not to use NMS Port.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-167 Warning Dialog Box


The General Setting option window appears again.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-123

8. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-168 General Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-169 Information Dialog Box


The General Setting window appears again.

10. Confirm that all the parameters are set:

Figure 3-170 General Setting Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-124 INITIAL SET UP

11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(2) General Setting (Details)

Procedure 3-35

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select General Setting (Detail). The General Setting window
appears.

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-125

Setup button

Figure 3-171 General Setting (Detail) Window

The General Setting (Detail) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-126 INITIAL SET UP

5. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 3-172 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-127

 NE2 Port Setting


Selecting Used enables remaining options.

 Inband Management VLAN Setting


Selecting Used enables remaining options.

 Ethernet Port Setting


Setting Usage to Used enables the remaining options.

 NE Branch Setting

i) Click the target item. The option window to set IP Address and Subnet Mask appears.

ii) Enter the addresses, then click the OK button.

Figure 3-173 Option Window for Setting Addresses


General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

iii) Click the Bridge No. of the target item. General Setting (Detail) (NMS) option window
appears.

iv) Select a Bridge No., and click the OK button.

Figure 3-174 General Setting (Detail) (NMS) Window

The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-128 INITIAL SET UP

v) Verify the settings:

Figure 3-175 General Setting (Detail) Option Window

vi) When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

vii) Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-176 Information Dialog Box


The General Setting (Detail) option window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-129

 NMS Port Setting / LCT Port Setting


Click the radio buttons for their usage.

Table 3-38 General Setting (Detail) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
NE2 Port Setting
NE2 Port IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of NE2 Port when
NE2 (RJ45) Port is used for serial con-
nection to other PASOLINK.
NE2 Port Usage Used Use NE2 Port. Selecting this option en-
ables other NE2 Port Setting parameters.
Not Used Not to use NE2 Port.
NE2 Port Speed 19200 Specify the baud rate. [unit: bps]
9600
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Inband Management VLAN Used Use the Inband Management VLAN. Se-
Usage lecting this option enables other Inband
Management VLAN Setting options.
Not Used Not to use the Inband Management
VLAN.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Man-
agement VLAN.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the Subnet Mask.
Ethernet Port Setting
Usage Used Selects to use the port.
Not Used Selects not to use the port.
Auto Negotiation Enabled Enables
Disabled
Speed Status (read only) Indicates the current status.
Duplex Status (read only) Indicates the current mode.
Discovery Usage Used
Not Used
NE Branch Setting (see NE Branch Setting in Step 5.)
Branch 1 Branch Specify the Branch Number. between 1 to
to 14.
14 Branch
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the address of Default Gateway.
Bridge No. (read only) Indicates the assigned Bridge No.
Bridge IP Address (read only) Indicates the Bridge IP Address.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-130 INITIAL SET UP

Parameter Value Description


Bridge Subnet Mask (read only) Indicates the Bridge Subnet Mask.
NMS Port Setting
Connect NMS Port to NMS Yes Enables a connection to NMS.
No Disables a connections to NMS.
LCT Port Setting
Restrict LCT Connection Any Allows LCT connecting to both Local and
Remote NEs.
Only to Local NE Allows LCT connecting only to the Local
NE.

6. When completed, click the OK button of the General Setting (Detail) option
window. General Setting (Detail) window updates the information.

7. Confirm that all the parameters are set.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-131

Figure 3-177 General Setting (Detail) Window


8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-132 INITIAL SET UP

(3) Routing Setting

This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP Address.

(a) Add Routing Setting

Procedure 3-36

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-178 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-133

5. Click the Add button on the tool bar.

Add button

Figure 3-179 Routing Setting Option Window


The Routing Setting (Add) option window appears.

6. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask Address, and Gateway Address, then click the
OK button.

Figure 3-180 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window


The Routing Setting option window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-134 INITIAL SET UP

7. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed, then click the OK
button.

Figure 3-181 Routing Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-182 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-183 Information Dialog Box


The Routing Setting window updates the information.

10. Confirm that the newly added route information is displayed.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-135

Figure 3-184 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify Routing Setting

Procedure 3-37

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup button

Figure 3-185 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-136 INITIAL SET UP

5. Click on the target IP Address to be modified.

Figure 3-186 Routing Setting Option Window


Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears.

6. Modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway, then click the OK button.

Figure 3-187 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window


The Routing Setting option window updates the information.
7. Confirm that modified route information, then click the OK button.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-137

Figure 3-188 Routing Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-189 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-190 Information Dialog Box


The Routing Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-138 INITIAL SET UP

10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.

Figure 3-191 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(c) Delete Routing Setting

Procedure 3-38

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-139

Setup button

Figure 3-192 Routing Setting Window


Routing Setting option window appears.

5. Click Delete button on the tool bar.

Delete button

Figure 3-193 Routing Setting Option Window


Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.

6. Enter the target network address into the IP Address field, then click the OK
button.

Figure 3-194 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-140 INITIAL SET UP

The Routing Setting option window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the selected network address has been removed, then click the OK
button.

Figure 3-195 Routing Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-196 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-197 Information Dialog Box


The Routing Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-141

10. Confirm the display for the modified route information.

Figure 3-198 Routing Setting Window


11. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

(4) IP Access Control Setting

(a) Input Filter List — Add Entry

Procedure 3-39

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-142 INITIAL SET UP

4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry button on the tool bar.

Input Filter List tab


Add Entry button

Figure 3-199 IP Access Control Setting Window

The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-143

5. Specify the filter condition:

Figure 3-200 Input Filter Entry (Add) Option Window

Table 3-39 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Entry No. 1 to 50 Specify the entry number.
Input Index Any Select the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol
Other Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported)
1 to 50
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-144 INITIAL SET UP

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-201 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm that the newly added filter information displayed.

Figure 3-202 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-145

(b) Input Filter List — Modify Entry

Procedure 3-40

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target.

Input Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)

Figure 3-203 IP Access Control Setting Window


The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-146 INITIAL SET UP

5. Specify the filter condition, then click the OK button.

Figure 3-204 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

Table 3-40 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of
the incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol
Other Selecting Other here requires to set the Port Numbers.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
port for the destination.
1 to 50 Select a port for the destination.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified condi-
tions.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-147

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-205 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed.

Figure 3-206 IP Address Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(c) Input Filter List — Delete Entry

Procedure 3-41

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-148 INITIAL SET UP

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry button on the tool bar.

Input Filter List tab

Delete Entry button

Figure 3-207 IP Access Control Setting Window


The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.

5. Enter the target Entry No., then click the OK button.

Figure 3-208 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-149

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-209 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-210 Confirmation Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

Figure 3-211 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-150 INITIAL SET UP

(d) Input Filter List — Modify Rule

Procedure 3-42

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

4. Select Input Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule button on the tool bar.

Input Filter List tab

Modify Rule button

Figure 3-212 IP Access Control Setting Window


The Input Filter Rule option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-151

5. Set the filter conditions:

Figure 3-213 Input Filter Rule Option Window

Table 3-41 Input Filter Rule Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Input Filter Rule Enable Enables the configured input filters.
Disable Disables the configured input filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured condi-
tions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured condi-
tions.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-214 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-152 INITIAL SET UP

8. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed

Figure 3-215 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(e) Forwarding Filter List — Add Entry

Procedure 3-43

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-153

4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Add Entry button on the tool bar.

Forwarding Filter List tab

Add Entry button

Figure 3-216 IP Access Control Setting Window


The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-154 INITIAL SET UP

5. Set the filter conditions:

Figure 3-217 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window

Table 3-42 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Entry No. 1 to 50 Enter the entry number.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Ad-
dress for output packets.
Destination IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Destination IP Address to output
packets.
Destination Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP
Address for the output packets.
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-155

Parameter Value Description


ICMP Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.
TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions
above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions
above.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-218 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-156 INITIAL SET UP

8. Confirm that the newly added filter information is displayed.

Figure 3-219 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(f)Forwarding Filter List — Modify Entry

Procedure 3-44

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-157

4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Entry No. of the target:

Forwarding Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)

Figure 3-220 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-158 INITIAL SET UP

5. Modify the filter conditions:

Figure 3-221 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window

Table 3-43 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Output Index Any Selects the egfess port.
Inband
NE2
Bridge1 to Bridge6
Source IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address
for output packets.
Destination IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Destination IP Address to output pack-
ets.
Destination Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP Ad-
dress for the output packets.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-159

Parameter Value Description


Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
ICMP Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.
TCP
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Destination Port Any (Currently not supported.)
1 to 65535
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-222 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm the display for the modified filter conditions.

Figure 3-223 IP Access Control Setting Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-160 INITIAL SET UP

This step ends the procedure.

(g) Forwarding Filter List — Delete Entry

Procedure 3-45

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Delete Entry button on the tool
bar.

Forwarding Filter List tab

Delete Entry button

Figure 3-224 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-161

5. Enter the Entry No. of the target, then click the OK button.

Figure 3-225 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-226 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-227 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-162 INITIAL SET UP

8. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

Figure 3-228 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(h) Forwarding Filter List — Modify Rule

Procedure 3-46

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
Setting window appears.

4. Select Forwarding Filter List tab, then click the Modify Rule button on the tool
bar.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-163

Forwarding Filter List tab

Modify Rule button

Figure 3-229 IP Access Control Setting Window


Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears.

5. Modify the filter condition:

Figure 3-230 Forwarding Filter Rule Option Window

Table 3-44 Forwarding Filter Rule Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Forwarding Filter Enable Enables the configured forwarding filters.
Rule Disable Disables the configured forwarding filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured condi-
tions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured conditions.

6. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-164 INITIAL SET UP

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 3-231 Information Dialog Box


The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm the display for the modified filter information.

Figure 3-232 IP Access Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(5) 5000S Link Setting

In 5000S / IP Hybrid Configuration, The network management system recognizes it as when it


should be indicated as single NE in the network management system, operate as follows.

Procedure 3-47

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the system into
the Maintenance Mode.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select 5000S Link Setting. The 5000S Link Setting window
appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL SET UP 3-165

4. Click Setup button on the tool bar.

Setup buttom

Figure 3-233 5000S Link Setting Window


5. 5000S Link Setting option window appears. Check to Link Usage as Used, check
to Own Link ID (5000iPS System) as 1 or 2, and enter the IP address of the 5000S
System Link ID, and then click the OK button.

Figure 3-234 5000S Link Setting Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


3-166/END INITIAL SET UP

Table 3-45 5000S Link Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Link Usage Used Select when needed in 5000S / IP Hybrid Configuration
Not Used Select when not needed
Own Link ID 1 Set the 5000iPS System Link ID to 1 or 2
2
Link ID 1 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP address of the 5000S System Link ID.
Link ID 2 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Another side is masked with indicating the 5000iPS
Link ID which linked to above Own Link ID setting.

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 3-235 Information Dialog Box


7. 5000S Link Setting result window appears again. Confirm that all parameters are
set.

Figure 3-236 5000S Link Setting Window (Result)


8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit
from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from yellow to white.

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-1

4. INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

4.1 General
After Initial Set Up, some configurations are required the DADE (Differential Absolute Delay
Equalization) adjustment which set the path delay difference to the minimum for performing
the effective operation.

In addition, when Contiguous or ACCP type BR CKT is equipped, Delay Equalizer


Adjustment is necessary.

However, this adjustment is regularly operated in the production time. It is needed to operate
in BR CKT type change, or MODEM replacement case.

4.2 Adjustment Case

4.2.1 Hot Standby / Twin Path System


These have BB RX SW that acts as Hitless Switch when No.1 and No.2 data are in phase. To
set the delay difference to minimum, operate following adjustment referring to section 4.3.

 BB RX SW DADE Adjustment

No.1 RX DEM BB

BB RX SW

No.2 RX DEM BB

4.2.2 Space Diversity Equipped System


It has IF Combiner that performs in combining the Main and the SD signals are in phase.
To set the delay difference to minimum, operate following adjustment referring to section 4.3.

 SD DADE Adjustment

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-2 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Main RX RF RX IF

IF COMB DEM
SD RX RF RX IF

4.2.3 XPIC Equipped System


It has Interference Canceller which performs in the Master and the Slave signals are in phase.
To set the delay difference to minimum, operate following adjustment referring to section 4.3.

 XPIC DEM DADE Adjustment

Master RX XDEM BB

Slave RX XDEM BB

4.2.4 Contiguous or ACCP type BR CKT Equipped System


It is consist of narrow band BPF that has sharp delay characteristics, and needs detail
adjustment.

To equalize the delay for each channel, operate following adjustment with referring to Section
4.3. in the case of BR CKT type change, or MODEM replacement time.

 BR CKT Delay Equalizer Adjustment

4.3 Adjustment Methods

4.3.1 BB RX SW DADE Adjustment


DADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced or MODEM is to be
added/replaced. (In initial start-up, the offset memory can be used to minimize the delay, but it
may interrupt traffic when the delay is substantial.)

Procedure 4-1

1. Click Maintenance button on the top of the LCT window to enter maintenance
mode.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-3

2. Expand the Maintenance Control from the LCT menu.

3. Select the Offline Maintenance from the Maintenance Control sub menu.

4. The Offline Maintenance Control window appears. Select the Control in the DADE
Adjust field.

Figure 4-1 Offline Maintenance Control Window

5. The Offline Maintenance Control option window appears.


Select the specified status from the DADE Adjust drop-down list, and then click
OK button.

Figure 4-2 Offline Maintenance Control Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-4 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Table 4-1 DADE Adjust Parameters

Parameter Value Description


DADE Adjust DADE Operational system (RXSW selection) is fixed to run
DADE. The operational system is not changed to avoid
any circuit interruption.
Offset DADE After DADE adjustment, it offsets in a DADE memory so
the amount of delay may serve as the minimum. Due to
the memory offset, it may cause any circuit interruption.
DADE Off DADE does not adjust, but in order to minimize the amount
of delay, it is set as the very end of the memory.

6. Click OK button after configuring the parameters.

7. The Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-3 Warning Dialog Box

8. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-4 Information Dialog Box

9. The Offline Maintenance Control window appears again. Confirm the parameters
displayed.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-5

Figure 4-5 Offline Maintenance Control Window

10. When completed, click Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to
exit maintenance mode.

11. Confirm that the MAINT indication color turns from amber to white.

This step ends the procedure.

4.3.2 XPIC DEM DADE Adjustment


If the feeders between 5000iPS and Antenna of Master side and that of Slave side have more
than 8 m differences, the following adjustment is required.

Procedure 4-2

1. Click Maintenance button on the top of the LCT window to enter maintenance
mode.

2. Expand the Maintenance Control from the LCT menu.

3. Select the Offline Maintenance from the Maintenance Control sub menu.

The Offline Maintenance Control window appears.

4. Click in the cell of the X-DEM Delay Adjust [m].

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-6 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-6 Offline Maintenance Control Window

5. The Offline Maintenance Control option window appears.


Select the appropriate range according to the actual difference between Master side
feeder and Slave side feeder connecting between 5000iPS and Antenna, then click
OK button.

Figure 4-7 Offline Maintenance Control Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-7

Table 4-2 X-DEM Delay Adjust Parameters

Parameter Value Description


X-DEM Delay –31 to –24 [m] The Slave-side cable is 31 to 24 m shorter than Mas-
Ad-just ter-side cable.
–24 to –16 [m] The Slave-side cable is 24 to 16 m shorter than Mas-
ter-side cable.
–16 to –8 [m] The Slave-side cable is 16 to 8 m shorter than Master-side
cable.
–8 to 8 [m] Difference in cable length of Slave-side against that of
Master-side is within –8 m to +8 m.
8 to 16 [m] The Slave-side cable is 8 to 16 m longer than Master-side
cable.
16 to 24 [m] The Slave-side cable is 16 to 24 m longer than Master-side
cable.
24 to 32 [m] The Slave-side cable is 24 to 32 m longer than Master-side
cable.

Example: When the feeder of Master-side is 10 m, and that of Slave-side is 1 m, the


Slave-side feeder is 9 m shorter (–9 m), where the option to select should be –16
to –8 [m].

The Warning dialog box appears.

6. This adjust occurs traffic interruption. After confirmation, click the OK button.

Figure 4-8 Warning Dialog Box

7. The Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-8 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-9 Information Dialog Box

8. The Offline Maintenance Control window updates the information. Confirm that
the status is modified as same as the selection in previous step.

Figure 4-10 Offline Maintenance Control Window

9. When completed, click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window
to exit from the Maintenance mode.

10. Confirm that the MAINT color turns from amber to white.

This step ends the procedure.

4.3.3 Space Diversity DADE Adjustment


The SD DADE Adjustment can be executed by Initial Setting Tool operation in the SD system.
This adjustment is performed together with the opposite station. The receiving signal level
should be within normal SD reception range.

Procedure 4-3

1. At the receive side station, connect to the WebLCT, and operate as follows.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-9

- When redundancy system, switchover the affected channel by [Maintenance Control


-> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control -> TX/RX SW Manual
Control]

- When redundancy system, set the switchover to LOCK-IN by [Maintenance Control


-> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control -> Lock-in Control]
-> Set to the Maintenance mode by Maintenance button

2. At the transmit side station, connect to the WebLCT, and operate as follows.

- When redundancy system, switchover the affected channel by [Maintenance Control


-> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control -> TX/RX SW Manual
Control]

- When redundancy system, set the switchover to LOCK-IN by [Maintenance Control


-> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control -> Lock-in Control]

- Set to the Maintenance mode by Maintenance button

- Set to the Manual Transmit Power Control mode by [Maintenance Control -


MODEM Maintenance Control - ATPC Manual Control]

3. At the transmit side station, set to Sweep for DADE V mode by following steps.

4. Click Initial Setting Tool Login link on the LCT Login window.

Figure 4-11 LCT Login Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-10 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

5. The Initial Setting Tool login window appears. After confirmation of Warning
comment, input User Name and Password, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-12 Initial Setting Tool Login Window

6. The Initial Setting Tool window appears. Click Local Maintenance button on the
toolbar.

Figure 4-13 Initial Setting Tool Window

7. The Confirmation dialog box appears. This comment means that MDP section will

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-11

be reset automatically when Logout from the tool. During about 5 minutes, the
traffics are interrupted, and cannot log in again. After confirmation, click the OK
button.

Figure 4-14 Confirmation Dialog Box

8. The Mount indications change to linkages. Click the Mount link of TRP Sweep
function.

Figure 4-15 Initial Setting Tool Window

9. The Carrier Sweep Setting window appears. Click the TRP / Slot No. link.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-12 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-16 Carrier Sweep Setting Window

10. The Carrier Sweep Setting (TRP / Slot No.) window appears. Click the Sweep for
DADE V radio button, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-17 Carrier Sweep Setting Window

Table 4-3 Carrier Sweep Setting (TRP / Slot No.) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Carrier Sweep Sweep for DADE V Carrier Sweep ON

Disable Carrier Sweep OFF

11. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-18 Information Dialog Box

NOTE: The Carrier Sweep Setting (TRP / Slot No.) window remains open until Disable is
executed..

12. At the receive side station, execute SD DADE by following steps.

13. Click Initial Setting Tool Login link on the LCT Login window.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-13

Figure 4-19 LCT Login Window

14. The Initial Setting Tool login window appears. Input User Name and Password, and
click the OK button.

Figure 4-20 Initial Setting Tool Login Window

15. The Initial Setting Tool window appears. Click Local Maintenance button on the
toolbar.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-14 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-21 Initial Setting Tool Window

16. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-22 Confirmation Dialog Box

17. The Mount indications change to linkages. Click the Mount link of SD DADE
function.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-15

Figure 4-23 Initial Setting Tool Window

18. The DADE Adjust Setting window appears. Click the SD / Slot No. link.

Figure 4-24 DADE Adjust Setting Window

19. The DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) window appears. Set the path which is to
be inserted the DADE, Set as Adjust Operation, and enter Adjust Operation Value,
and click the OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-16 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Table 4-4 DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


SD / MAIN / Dis- SD Set DADE to the SD path
able
MAIN Set DADE to the MAIN path

Disable Cancel the DADE Value

Operation Adjust Adjust the DADE by Adjust Operation Value (Not Saved)

Save Fix the DADE by Adjust Operation Value

Revert Return to the previous saved value

Adjust Operation 1 to 127 [ns] Set DADE adjust value


Value
DADE V (read only) Adjust result monitor voltage is indicated

Figure 4-25 DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) Window

20. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-26 Information Dialog Box

21. The adjustment result appears. Check the DADE V value.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-17

Figure 4-27 DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) Window

NOTE: The DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) window remains up to execute Disable,
Save, Revert.

22. Repeat the Step-19 to 21 so that the DADE V becomes the minimum (0.2[V] or
less) with refer to following images. When there are some same DADE V result,
enter the center value.

DADE V

Adjust Target: 0.2 [V] or less

DADE Adjust Value

NOTE: Though the adjustable range of DADE is from 1 to 127 ns, it is impossible DADE
adjustment when the path length difference between Main and SD is less than 5 ns,
because, a 5 ns fixed DADE (equivalent to 1 m length) is provided in the circuit. In
such a case (path length difference is less than 1m), adjust DADE value by RF feeder
length or IF cable length.

23. At the Operation parameter, select the Save mode, and click the OK button.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-18 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-28 DADE Adjust Setting (SD / Slot No.) Window

24. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-29 Information Dialog Box

25. The DADE Adjust Setting window appears as finish. Click the Back button to
return.

Figure 4-30 DADE Adjust Setting Window

26. At the transmit side station, reset to the Automatic Transmit Power Control mode.
And, finish the Sweep for DADE V by following steps.

27. Check the Disable, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-31 Carrier Sweep Setting (TRP / Slot No.) Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-19

28. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-32 Information Dialog Box

29. The Carrier Sweep Setting window appears as finish. Click the Back button to
return.

Figure 4-33 Carrier Sweep Setting Window

30. Repeat the Step-2 to 29 for applicable paths.

31. After all setting finished, click the Logout button. By notice in Step-7, it starts the
MDP section reset action; it is recommended that Logout should be done after
finishing all Initial Setting Tool Items.

Figure 4-34 Initial Setting Tool Window

32. When finished, restore all manual setting in Step-1 and 2 to the normal operation
mode in the transmit and receive side stations.

This step ends the procedure.

4.3.4 BR CKT Delay Equalizer Adjustment


For contiguous type BR CKT or ACCP type BR CKT, the BR CKT with BPF functioned on
the narrow band width requires HOP Delay equalizing for each channel because of sharp

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-20 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Delay within the band width. The delay is equalized by the EQL in the DEM part on the
MODEM panel.

Because the Delay, generated in the BR CKT, vary with the BR CKT components (frequency,
transmission capacity, etc.), the HOP Delay is equalized by setting the Linear and Parabolic
EQL in the DEM part.

Setting the EQL values, varied with the BR CKT components, are indicated on the lower part
of the BR CKT. After delivery to the site, changing the EQL values are not required because of
shipment after normal operation is confirmed with the above EQL values shown.

[ Delay Equalizer Setting Value Label ]

[ Label Position ]

(1) Contiguous type BR CKT

Figure 4-35 Contiguous Type BR CKT

(2) ACCP type BR CKT (Hybrid-less BR CKT)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-21

Figure 4-36 ACCP Type BR CKT (Hybrid-Less BR CKT)

Moreover, when changing the EQL values due to panel faulty or system-
configuration change, etc., refer to the following procedure.

Procedure 4-4

1. Connect to the WebLCT, and operate as follows.

- When redundancy system, switchover the affected channel by


[Maintenance Control -> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control ->
TX/RX SW Manual Control]

- When redundancy system, set the switchover to LOCK-IN by


[Maintenance Control -> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control ->
Lock-in Control]

- Set to the Maintenance mode by


[Maintenance Control -> Protection Control -> MODEM TX/RX Switch Control ->
Lock-in Control]

2. Click Initial Setting Tool Login link on the LCT Login window.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-22 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-37 LCT Login Window

3. The Initial Setting Tool login window appears. Input User Name and Password, and
click the OK button.

Figure 4-38 Initial Setting Tool Login Window

4. The Initial Setting Tool window appears. Click Local Maintenance button on the
toolbar.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-23

Figure 4-39 Initial Setting Tool Window

5. The Confirmation dialog box appears. This comment means that MDP section will
be reset automatically when Logout from the tool. During about 5 minutes, the
traffics are interrupted, and can not Login again. After confirmation, click the OK
button.

Figure 4-40 Confirmation Dialog Box

6. The Mount indications change to linkages. Click the Mount link of MODEM
Equalizer function.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-24 INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4-41 Initial Setting Tool Window

7. The Delay Equalizer Setting window appears. Click the MODEM / Slot No. link.

Figure 4-42 Dela y Equalizer Setting Window

8. The Delay Equalizer Setting (MODEM / Slot No.) window appears. Set the Linear
Equalizer or Parabolic Equalizer value in accordance with the label indication on
BR CKT.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


INITIAL ADJUSTMENT 4-25

Figure 4-43 Delay Equalizer Setting (MODEM / Slot No.) Window

Table 4-5 Delay Equalizer Setting (MODEM / Slot No.) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Linear Equalizer –90 to 90 [ns] Set in accordance with Label indication on BR CKT

Parabolic Equalizer 0 to 60 [ns] Set in accordance with Label indication on BR CKT

9. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-44 Information Dialog Box

10. The Delay Equalizer Setting result window appears again. Confirm that all
parameters are set, the click the Back button.

Figure 4-45 Dela y Equalizer Setting Result Window

11. Repeat the Step-5 to 9 for applicable MODEM.

12. After all settings are finished, click the Logout button. By notice in Step-4, it starts
the MDP section reset action; it is recommended that Logout should be done after

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


4-26/END INITIAL ADJUSTMENT

13. finishing all Initial Setting Tool operation items.

Figure 4-46 Initial Setting Tool Window

14. Restore all manual setting in Step-1 to the normal operation mode.

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-1

5. DETAIL SETUP

NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft® Internet Explorer for the browsing software as an
example.

5.1 General
When more detailed custom set up is needed for each site plan, it is refered to the procedure in
this section.

5.2 Radio Function Setting

5.2.1 Overview
The setup procedures provided here are for further system fundamental configuration after the
equipment setup. The setting items are listed as follows:

 MODEM Function Setting


Configures the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1 threshold, etc., for
each selected MODEM.
 ETH Function Setting
Configures the Ethernet port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QOS, link loss forwarding, etc.
 E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting
Configures the E1 port, STM-1 port and cross connect.
 Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting
Sets the internal clock, external clock, and timing source.
 V.11/OW Setting
Configures the user interface of 5000iPS (V.11,RS-232C) and OW buzzer.
 Alarm/AIS Setting
Sets the alarm delay, severity, color and relevant settings of AIS.
 PMON/RMON Setting
Sets the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).
 AUX Setting
Configures the relevant settings of the auxiliary (AUX).

For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-2 DETAIL SETUP

5.2.2 Set MODEM Function


Users can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, E1/STM-1 threshold, etc., for
each selected MODEM:

 MODEM Port Setting


Specifies the port name of each MODEM.
 Radio Switch Setting
Specifies the TX/RX switch priority that prevents from unnecessary switching.
 TX Power Setting
Specifies the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
 ALM Mode Setting
Specifies the ATPC power mode and ALM mode for TRP communication failure.
 XPIC Setting
Specifies the XPIC configuration.
 AMR Setting
Specifies the AMR Switching condition.

5.2.3 Set MODEM Ports


Specify the Port Name to each MODEM:

Procedure 5-1
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select MODEM Port Setting. The MODEM Port Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-3

3. Click a desired MODEM to configure:

Figure 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Window


MODEM Port Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate name to the MODEM:

Figure 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter


Parameter Value Description
Port Name (text field) Specify a Port Name. Valid value: one to 32 characters long.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-3 Information Dialog Box


The MODEM Port Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-4 DETAIL SETUP

7. Confirm the displayed information.

Figure 5-4 MODEM Port Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.2.4 Set Radio Switch Parameters


Specify the TX/RX SW priority and TXSW locking usage, and TX SW reverse function usage.
This operation configures the following items:

 TX SW Priority
Specifies the TX switch priority in transmit direction. (for Hot-Standby System only)
 TX SW Lock-In Usage
Enabling this function prevents the system from causing TX switching repeatedly in
case of a cable problem between MDP and TRP.
 TX SW Reverse Function Usage
This function enables to carry out the local TX switch if the opposite station detects the
TX transmit failure from the local station.
 RX SW Priority
Specifies the RX switching priorities. (for Hot-Standby system and Twin-Path system
only)

Procedure 5-2
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select Radio Switch Setting. The Radio Switch Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-5

3. Click a desired SW GRP to configure:

Figure 5-5 Radio Switch Setting Window


Radio Switch Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-6 Radio Switch Setting Option Window

Table 5-2 Radio Switch Setting Parameter


Parameter Value Description
TX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1
whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-6 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


TX SW Lock-in Usage Used Enables to lock the TX SW operations. Available only when
the TX SW Priority is set to No.1. If switching operations
are carried out for more than 10 times within 10 minutes,
TX will be locked on to No. 2, which will be released after
24 hours when No. 1 recovers or has no failure.
Not Used Disables to lock the TX SW operation.
TX SW Reverse Used Enables the Reverse Function. Available only when the TX
Function Usage SW Priority is set to Non Priority. If both ODUs at the local
site fail to receive signals from the opposite end, a silent
alarm is output to the opposite end to carry out the forced
switch replacing the working TRP to the standby ODY.
Not Used Disables the Reverse Function.
RX SW Priority No. 1 Selecting this option reverts/assigns online mode to No. 1
whenever No. 1 recovers or is in normal operation.
Non Priority This option sets Non-Revertive mode.
RX SW Condition Early Included Early Includes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an
Warning Warning automatic switch.
Excluded Early Excludes the Early Warning in the switch factor by an
Warning automatic switch.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-7 Information Dialog Box


The Radio Switch Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-7

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-8 Radio Switch Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.2.5 Set TX Power Parameters


Specify the thresholds of TX Power and RX Power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.

(1) ATPC Mode

Procedure 5-3
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-8 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-9 TX Power Setting Window


TX Power Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-10 TX Power Setting Option Window

Table 5-3 TX Power Setting Parameters (ATPC)


Parameter Value Description
ATPC Range (MAX) +9 to +33 Set the maximum level of TRP TX Power for
ATPC Mode. [unit: dBm]
ATPC Range (MIN) +9 to +33 Set the minimum level of TRP TX Power for ATPC
Mode.
MTPC TX Power ——— (Not editable)
RX Threshold –90 to –30 Set the input threshold level for when the opposite
end is in ATPC Mode.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-9

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-11 Information Dialog Box


The TX Power Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-12 TX Power Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-10 DETAIL SETUP

(2) MTPC Mode

Procedure 5-4
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.

3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-13 TX Power Setting Window


TX Power Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-14 TX Power Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-11

Table 5-4 TX Power Setting Parameters (MTPC)


Parameter Value Description
ATPC Range (MAX) ——— (Not editable)
ATPC Range (MIN) ——— (Not editable)
MTPC TX Power +9 to +33 Set the TX Power level in MTPC mode.
RX Threshold ——— (Not applicable)

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-15 Information Dialog Box


The TX Power Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-16 TX Power Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-12 DETAIL SETUP

5.2.6 Set ALM Mode


Specify the ATPC Power and ALM Mode in case MDP fails in communicating with TRP.

Procedure 5-5
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select ALM Mode Setting. The ALM Mode Setting window
appears.

3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-17 ALM Mode Setting Window


ALM Mode Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-18 ALM Mode Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-13

Table 5-5 ALM Mode Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
ATPC Power Mode MAX Increases the TX Power to the maximum value.
MIN Decreases the TX Power to the minimum value.
Hold Holds the TX Power at the current value.
TRP COMM ALM Mode Mute Mutes the TX Power if MDP fails in
communicating with TRP.
Hold Holds the TX Power if MDP fails in communicating
with TRP.

NOTE: When the MTPC Mode is selected, ATPC Power Mode option is disabled.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-19 Information Dialog Box


The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-20 ALM Mode Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-14 DETAIL SETUP

5.2.7 Set XPIC


Specify the TRP Operation against the LO REF condition.

Procedure 5-6
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select XPIC Setting. The XPIC Setting window appears.

3. Click a desired XPIC GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-21 XPIC Setting Window


XPIC Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-22 XPIC Setting Option Window

Table 5-6 XPIC Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
XPIC Condition - Local Fail Mute Enables the Mute Control against TRP [default]
REF LO. -> Self LO. Suspends the XPIC function on MODEM, where
signals from TRP are output as they are.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-15

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-23 Information Dialog Box


The XPIC Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-24 XPIC Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.2.8 Set AMR


This procedure specifies conditions to carry out the AMR switching operation where the AMR
Mode is enabled. See 4.4.2.4 AMR Configuration for enabling AMR.

Procedure 5-7
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand MODEM
Function Setting to select AMR Setting. The AMR Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-16 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click a desired MODEM/SW GRP No. to configure:

Figure 5-25 AMR Mode Setting Window


AMR Setting option window appears.

4. Select a condition to carry out AMR Switch operation:

Figure 5-26 AMR Setting Option Window

Table 5-7 AMR Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
AMR Switch Condition CNR + RSL Carries out AMR by CNR when the modulation
scheme is downward; or by RSL when the
modulation scheme is the upward (e.g., 64QAM
to 256QAM), AMR is carried out by RSL).
[default]
CNR Carries out AMR by CNR.
When use SD with the Linear Adder mode and the
AMR function, it is recommended to set as CNR
mode.

CNR (Carrier Noise Ratio): Automatically operates AMR If the noise within
the carrier wave increases.

RSL (Receive Signal Level): Operates AMR the receiving power changed.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-17

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-27 Information Dialog Box


The AMR Mode Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-28 AMR Mode Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-18 DETAIL SETUP

5.3 Set ETH Function

5.3.1 Overview
The ETH Function Setting provides the following options:

 Bridge Setting
Bridge function is also known as the switching function, which enables the device in the
multiple network segments can communicate with each other. User can configure the
FDB (forward database) aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN mode here.
 ETH Port Setting
This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on
the front panel of 5000iPS, including port name, line speed, Mode, Flow Control,
Broadcast Storm Control Control, etc.
 VLAN Setting
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices that are separated
physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast domain and also
protect the data from sending to other domain even they may connect physically.
This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the VLAN.
 FDB Setting
5000iPS can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and save the port
— MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding DataBase) based on
IEEE802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static mapping information
manually by this function.
 ETH OAM Setting
5000iPS supports Ethernet OAM function based on ITU-T Y.1731 and IEEE802.1ag,
which enables operator to measure the Ethernet link quality such as delay, throughput,
jitter, loss and so on, greatly help network operator in maintenance and troubleshooting.
 RSTP Setting
5000iPS supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) which prevents from layer 2
level link loop with a faster manner comparing to legacy STP protocol.

User can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and other
parameters.
 QoS/Classification Setting
5000iPS supports QoS control function that provides different priority to different
applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of performance to a data

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-19

flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress Policer, Egress QoS and SP, TDM
E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential service strategy.
 Other ETH Port Setting
This function provides additional setting of bridge such as Mirror port, layer 2 protocol
transparency.
 LLF Setting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port on the
opposite device when local device detects unidirectional link problem.
 Broadcaset Storm Control Setting
This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring. This
function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port including
MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame, multicast frame, and
unknown address unicast frame collectively, frames beyond the specified band are
discarded at the circuit input.

5.3.2 Bridge Setting


Procedure 5-8
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Bridge Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button on the tool bar.

Modify button

Figure 5-29 Bridge Setting Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-20 DETAIL SETUP

Bridge Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-30 Bridge Setting Option Window

Table 5-8 Bridge Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Aging On/Off On Enables the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to
delete the learnt MAC Address if it is not updated
for a certain period specified by the FDB Aging
Time.
Off Disables the Aging function.
FDB Aging Time 5 to 163680 Specifies the aging time period when the Aging
function is enabled. [unit: second]
GbE MAX Frame Size 64 v 9600 Specifies the maximum frame size for a GbE
(Giga-bit Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]
FE MAX Frame Size 64 to 2000 Specifies the maximum frame size for an FE (Fast
Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]
VLAN Mode 802.1q Allows the port for different VLANs to
communicate with each other through a Layer-3
network device.
802.1ad Allows the switches in a service provider network
to transparently carry customer’s Layer-2 control
frames, separate from the service provider’s traffic
and from other traffic in the service provider’s
network.
Default VID 1 to 4094 Enter the default VID of the equipment. [default: 1]
Default VLAN TPID 8100 to FFFF Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value
of VLAN. [default: 0x8100]

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-21

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-31 Information Dialog Box


The Bridge Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-32 Bridge Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.3.3 ETH Port Setting


Procedure 5-9
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH Port Setting. The ETH Port Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-22 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click the desired Port No. to configure.

Figure 5-33 ETH Port Setting Window


ETH Port Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-34 ETH Port Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-23

Table 5-9 ETH Port Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Port Usage Enable Enable the port administratively.
Disable Shut down the port administratively.
Port Name (text field) Enter the Ethernet Port name. Valid value is zero to
32 characters long.
Media Type Electrical (Not editable.)
Optical
Speed AUTO Sets Autonegotiation to select the speed at
establishing each link. Selecting AUTO disables
Duplex and MDI and MDIX options below.
10Mbps Specifies 10 Mbit/s rate.
100Mbps Specifies 100 Mbit/s rate.
1000Mbps Specifies 1000 Mbit/s rate.
Duplex Half Specifies the duplex mode. This option is disabled
Full when the Speed option selects AUTO.
MDI and MDI-X MDI Specifies the port media type. This option is disabled
MDI-X when the Speed option selects AUTO.
Flow Control Enable Enables the Flow Control function.
Disable Disables the Flow Control function.
Synch ETH Enable Enables the Synchronous Ethernet function.
Disable Disables the Synchronous Ethernet function.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-35 Information Dialog Box


The ETH Port Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-24 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-36 ETH Port Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.3.4 VLAN Setting

(1) VLAN List Tab

(a) Add VLAN ID

Procedure 5-10
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.

3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Add VLAN ID button on the tool bar.

VLAN LIST tab

Add VLAN ID button

Figure 5-37 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN List Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-25

The Add VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Specify VLAN ID and VLAN Service Name:

Figure 5-38 Add VLAN ID Option Window

Table 5-10 Add VLAN ID Parameters


Parameter Value Description
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Enter VLAN ID.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter VLAN Service Name. Valid value is one to
32 characters long.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-39 Information Dialog Box


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-26 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-40 VLAN Setting Window— VLAN List Tab


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify VLAN Service Name

Procedure 5-11
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.

3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the target item under the VLAN Service Name.

Figure 5-41 VLAN Setting — VLAN List Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-27

Modify VLAN Service Name option window appears.

4. Enter the modified name into the VLAN Service Name text box, then click the OK
button.

Figure 5-42 Modify VLAN Service Name Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-43 Information Dialog Box


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-44 VLAN Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-28 DETAIL SETUP

(c) Delete VLAN ID

Procedure 5-12
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.

3. Select the VLAN List tab, then click the Delete VLAN ID button on the tool bar.

VLAN LIST tab

Delete VLAN ID button

Figure 5-45 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN List Tab


The Delete VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Enter the VLAN ID or VLAN Service Name to be removed:

Figure 5-46 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — VLAN ID

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-29

Figure 5-47 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — VLAN Service Name


5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-48 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-49 Information Dialog Box


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-30 DETAIL SETUP

8. Verify the displayed parameters.

Figure 5-50 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN List Tab


This step ends the procedure.

(2) VLAN Setting Tab

(a) Set VLAN ID

Procedure 5-13
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-31

3. Select the VLAN Setting tab, then click a port number (listed under the Port) to
register VLAN settings.

VLAN Setting tab

Port Numbers

Figure 5-51 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN Setting Tab


VLAN Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected
port type:

Port Type

Figure 5-52 VLAN Setting Option Window

NOTE: For MODEM, Trunk is the only choice to select.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-32 DETAIL SETUP

 Port Type: Access

Figure 5-53 VLAN Setting Option Window — Access

 Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Access.

 The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.

 Incoming tagged frames are discarded at the ports selected here.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-33

 Port Type: Tunnel

Figure 5-54 VLAN Setting Option Window — Tunnel

 Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Tunnel.

 At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with
any VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID,
which is checked in the list.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-34 DETAIL SETUP

 Port Type: Trunk

Figure 5-55 VLAN Setting Option Window — Trunk

 Check (click to leave ticks in the) check boxes of the VLANs that are to
configure the port type: Trunk.

 At the ports selected here, tagged frames with the VLAN IDs that are checked
in the list are allowed to pass through.

 An untagged frame will be assigned with the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN
in UntagFrame Assignment column.

 Other types of frames are discarded.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-35

Table 5-11 VLAN Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode (read only) Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type Access Allows untagged frames only to pass through.
Tunnel Allows both untagged and tagged frames to pass through.
Trunk Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass
through. An untagged frame will be assigned with the
specified VLAN ID.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box to select a
VLAN to assign the selected port type configuration.
UntagFrame Assignment (radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
(Access Port) frame.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-56 Information Dialog Box


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-57 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-36 DETAIL SETUP

5.3.5 FDB Setting

(1) FDB Setting Tab

(a) FDB Setting (Equipment)

Procedure 5-14
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.

3. Select the FDB Setting tab, then click on Equipment to configure.

Figure 5-58 FDB Setting — FDB Setting Tab


FDB Setting (Equipment) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-59 FDB Setting (Equipment) Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-37

Table 5-12 FDB Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Learning MAX Size 1 to 32512 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC Address entries.
Learning Limit Mode Forward If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address exceeds
the maximum size of FDB, the frame without learning this source
MAC Address will be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address discarded.
Learning Limit Trap Enable Enables the equipment to send a trap if the Learning MAC
Address reaches the specified MAX size.
Disable Disables the action above.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-60 Information Dialog Box


The FDB Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-61 FDB Setting Window — FDB Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-38 DETAIL SETUP

(b) FDB Setting (VLAN ID)

Procedure 5-15
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.

3. Select the FDB Setting tab, then click on the desired VLAN ID number to
configure.

Figure 5-62 FDB Setting Window — FDB Setting Tab


FDB Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:

Figure 5-63 FDB Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-39

Table 5-13 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Learning MAX Size 1 to 32512 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC
Address entries.
Learning Limit Mode Forward If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address
exceeds the maximum size of FDB, the frame without
learning this source MAC Address will be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC Address
discarded.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-64 Information Dialog Box


The FDB Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-65 FDB Setting Window — FDB Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-40 DETAIL SETUP

(2) Static Entry Tab

(a) Add Static Entry

Procedure 5-16
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.

3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Add button.

Figure 5-66 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-67 Static Entry (Add) Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-41

Table 5-14 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Item (Available Card) Names of available (registered) cards are shown
in the drop-down list. Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Available (registered) ports are shown in the
drop-down list. Select the target port.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Enter the object MAC Address.
Enable (radio button) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to assign the
port to the specified VLAN.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-68 Information Dialog Box


The FDB Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-69 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-42 DETAIL SETUP

(b) Modify Static Entry

Procedure 5-17
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.

3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Entry No. of the target to modify.

Entry No.

Figure 5-70 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Static Entry No. xxx) option window for the selected object appears.

4. Edit the MAC Address, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-71 Static Entry Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-43

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-72 Information Dialog Box


The FDB Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-73 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-44 DETAIL SETUP

(c) Delete Static Entry

Procedure 5-18
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.

3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Delete button.

Figure 5-74 FDD Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


Static Entry (Delete) option window for the selected object appears.

4. Check (leave a tick in) the check box of the target object, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-75 Static Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-45

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-76 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-77 Information Dialog Box


The FDB Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-78 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-46 DETAIL SETUP

5.3.6 ETH OAM Setting


 OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance

 MEG: Maintenance Entity Group

 MEP: MEG End Point

 MIP: MEG Intermediate Point

(1) OAM MEG TAB

(a) Add OAM MEG Index

Procedure 5-19
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Add MEG button.

Figure 5-79 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab


OAM MEG Setting (Add) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-47

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-80 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-15 OAM MEG Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
MEG Index 1 to 128 Set MEG Index number.
Maintenance Domain Name (text field) Maximum length in total of Maintenance Domain Name
Short MA Name (text field) and Short MA Name is 43 characters long.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level.
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
ETH-CC Period 3.3ms Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
10ms Message.
100ms
1s
10s
60s
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-81 Information Dialog Box


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-48 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-82 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-49

(b) Delete OAM MEG Index

Procedure 5-20
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Delete MEG button.

Figure 5-83 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab


OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to be removed, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-84 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-50 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-85 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-86 Information Dialog Box


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the target OAM MEG has been removed.

Figure 5-87 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-51

(2) OAM MEP Tab

(a) Add OAM MEP Index

Procedure 5-21
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Add MEP button.

Figure 5-88 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab


OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-52 DETAIL SETUP

4. Add Peer MEP ID first:

i) Enable radio buttons ii) Add Peer MEP button

Figure 5-89 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window


i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio button of
the target to select.

ii) Click Add P eer MEP button in the Peer MEP Co nfiguration option box. The
Peer MEP Add option window appears.

iii) Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.

Figure 5-90 Peer MEP Add Option Box

Table 5-16 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-53

iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the entries.

5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window:

Figure 5-91 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-17 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with
a VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG
Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (radio button, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by
MEG Configuration.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-54 DETAIL SETUP

6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-92 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-93 Information Dialog Box


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

9. Confirm that the newly added MEP Index information is displayed.

Figure 5-94 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-55

(b) Modify OAM MEP Index

Procedure 5-22
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the MEP Index number of the target to be
modified.

Figure 5-95 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab

OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-56 DETAIL SETUP

4. Modify the parameters:

Figure 5-96 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window

Table 5-18 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with
a VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG
Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (radio button, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by
MEG Configuration.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-57

5. When completed, click the OK button.

Confirmation dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-97 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-98 Information Dialog Box


ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm that the modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.

Figure 5-99 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-58 DETAIL SETUP

(c) Delete OAM MEP Index

Procedure 5-23
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MEP tab, then click the Delete MEP button of the target to be
removed.

OAM MEP tab

Delete MEP button

Figure 5-100 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab


OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.

Figure 5-101 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-59

6. Click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

Figure 5-102 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-103 Information Dialog Box

NOTE: When the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive is enabled, the following error message
appears upon executing the deletion operation.

Figure 5-104 Error Message

To delete the MEP Index properly, disable the CCM Transmit / CCM Receive first,
using the procedure provided in

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-60 DETAIL SETUP

(b) Modify OAM MEP Index.

When the operation is successfully completed, the ETH OAM Setting window
updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-61

8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.

Figure 5-105 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab


This step ends the procedure.

(3) OAM MIP Tab

(a) Add OAM MIP Index

Procedure 5-24
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-62 DETAIL SETUP

3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click the Add MIP button.

OAM MIP tab Add MIP button

Figure 5-106 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab


OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-63

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-107 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-19 OAM MIP Index Parameter


Parameter Value Description
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 32 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MG Level to the MIP.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-64 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-108 Information Dialog Box


ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-109 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-65

(b) Modify OAM MIP Index

Procedure 5-25
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click on the MIP Index number of the target.

OAM MIP tab

MIP Index numbers

Figure 5-110 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab

OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-66 DETAIL SETUP

4. Modify the parameter(s):

Figure 5-111 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window

Table 5-20 OAM MIP Index Parameter


Parameter Value Description
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 128 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MEG Level to the MIP.
Item (Available Card) Select the target card.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-67

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-112 Information Dialog Box


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.

Figure 5-113 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-68 DETAIL SETUP

(c) Delete OAM MIP Index

Procedure 5-26
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.

3. Select the OAM MIP tab, then click the Delete MIP button.

Delete MIP button


OAM MIP tab

Figure 5-114 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab

OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select the MIP Index number of the target, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-115 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window

Confirmation dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-69

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-116 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-117 Information Dialog Box


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm that the target OAM MIP Index has been removed.

Figure 5-118 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-70 DETAIL SETUP

5.3.7 RSTP Setting


 STP: Spanning Tree Protocol
 RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel function cannot be enabled on a port if it enables RSTP.

(1) Modify RSTP Port

Procedure 5-27
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify RSTP Port button.

Modify RSTP Port button

Figure 5-119 RSTP Setting Window


The RSTP Port Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-71

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-120 RSTP Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-21 RSTP Port Setting Parameter


Parameter Value Description
STP Mode RSTP Enables RSTP.
Disable Disables RSTP.
Enable (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to select the
target object.
Item (read only) Shows the information regarding the available
Slot (read only) cards.
Port (read only)
Port Name (read only
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path
costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path
(Value) Cost to Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target
port.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-72 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


P to P Port Force true Sets Point-to-Point
Force False Removes the Point-to-Point setting.
Auto Sets Point-to-Point automatically.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-121 Information Dialog Box


The RSTP Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-122 RSTP Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-73

(2) Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter

Procedure 5-28
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select RSTP Setting. The RSTP Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button on the tool bar.

Modify Detail RSTP Parameter button

Figure 5-123 RSTP Setting Window


The Detail RSTP Parameter Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-124 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-74 DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-22 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting


Parameter Value Description
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440 Sets STP Priority of the bridge.
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 1 Sets the period for sending the BPDU
2 Configuration from Root Bridge. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Forward 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from
Delay the Listening Port to Learning Port.
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-125 Information Dialog Box


The RSTP Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-75

7. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 5-126 RSTP Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.3.8 QoS/Classification Setting


 Classify Setting tab
5000iPS supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115, which classifies the traffic into
eight or four classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the predetermined
profile. Except for the default profile, a user can configure up to three additional profiles,
which provides a capability of realizing the flexible and user-orientated QoS strategy.
The Internal Priority is used for the following purposes:

i) Properly identifies the ingress traffic according to the predetermined Priority.

ii) Maps the eight classes of ingress traffic to four or eight classes at queuing the egress
traffic.

iii) Copies the original internal priority to the capsulated frame to prevent the traffic priority
from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN C-tag CoS/VLAN S-tag CoS)

 Ingress
At the ingress traffic, the internal priority is assigned to a frame to perform the flow
control according to the predetermined policer and the Yellow or Green Marker that is
applied to the frame to define whether to discard or forward the frame.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-76 DETAIL SETUP

 Egress
At the egress traffic, frames are queued according to the internal priority where the
Yellow or Green Marker is applied to determine whether to discard or forward the
frame.

(1) Classify Setting Tab (Equipment Based QoS Mode)

(a) Classify Entry Setting

Procedure 5-29
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click the Select Profile No. button.

Select Profile No. button

Figure 5-127 QoS/Classification Setting Window


The Select Profile No. option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-77

4. Select a Profile No. to specify, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-128 Select Profile No. Option Window


The QoS/Classification Setting window indicates the selected Profile No. in the
Current Classify Profile Information field.

5. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.

Classification Mode

Figure 5-129 QoS/Classification Setting Window


6. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK
button.

Figure 5-130 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-78 DETAIL SETUP

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-131 Information Dialog Box


8. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the target
object:.

Classify Profile No.

Figure 5-132 QoS/Classification Setting Window


The QoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-79

9. Click the Entry No. of the target to be classified.

Entry No.

Figure 5-133 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)


Classify Entry Setting option window appears.

10. Assign the Internal Priority to classify the target port:

Figure 5-134 Classify Entry Setting Option Window

Table 5-23 Classify Entry Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Classify Field VLAN CoS Selects to use VLAN with CoS priority tag.
IPv4 Precedence Selects to use IPv4 Precedence.
IPv4 DSCP Selects to use IPv4 DSCP.
IPv6 DSCP Selects to use IPv6 DSCP.
Other Selects to use other types of field.
Classify Priority 0 to 7 Enter the priority class.
Classify Internal Priority 0 to 7 Select the internal priority class.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-80 DETAIL SETUP

11. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

12. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-135 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

13. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-136 QoS Classification Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Delete Entry

Procedure 5-30
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-81

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.

Classification Mode

Figure 5-137 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Equipment Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK
button.

Figure 5-138 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-139 Information Dialog Box

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-82 DETAIL SETUP

6. From the Classify Profile No. drop-down list, select the profile number of the target
object:.

Classify Profile No.

Figure 5-140 QoS/Classification Setting Window


The QoS/Classification Setting shows the selected profile.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-83

7. Click the Delete Entry button.

Delete Entry button

Figure 5-141 QoS/Classification Setting Window (showing the target)


Delete Entry option window appears.

8. Select an entry number to be removed, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-142 Delete Entry Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-143 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-84 DETAIL SETUP

10. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-144 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the
information.

11. Verify that the selected entry is removed from the list.

Figure 5-145 QoS/Classification Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-85

(2) Classify Setting Tab (Port Based QoS Mode)

(a) Specify Port Classification Mode

Following steps specify the QoS Classification Mode and Default Priority of Ingress
direction for each port.

Procedure 5-31
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.

Classification Mode

Figure 5-146 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK button.

Figure 5-147 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-86 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-148 Information Dialog Box


6. Select a target Port No.:

Port No.

Figure 5-149 QoS/Classification Setting Window

Port Classification Mode Setting option window appears.

7. Specify the Port Classification Mode and Default Port Priority for the target port:

Figure 5-150 Port Classification Mode Setting Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-87

Table 5-24 Port Classification Mode Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Port Classification Mode Port For frames input at the target port, the internal
priority of all frames will be the default port priority
value. [default]
CoS(C-Tag) C-Tag value will be the internal priority value.
CoS(S-Tag) S-Tag value will be the internal priority value. This
option can be selected when VLAN Mode is
802.1ad.
IPv4/v6 DSCP The value that is mapped into eight classes
according to IPv4/v6 DSCP value will be the
internal priority value. A mapping table is set per
equipment.
Default Port Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the default internal priority to the target
port.

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-151 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the
information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-88 DETAIL SETUP

10. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-152 QoS Classification Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Specify DSCP Classification Mapping

Procedure 5-32
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-89

3. Click the Classification Mode option. The Classification Mode option window
appears.

Classification Mode

Figure 5-153 QoS/Classification Setting Window


4. Select Port Based QoS Mode by clicking its radio button, and click the OK button.

Figure 5-154 Classification Mode Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-155 Information Dialog Box

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-90 DETAIL SETUP

6. Click the DSCP Classification Mapping button:

DSCP Classification Mapping button

Figure 5-156 QoS/Classification Setting Window


The DSCP Classification Mapping option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-91

7. Specify values to parameters:

Figure 5-157 DSCP Classification Mapping Option Window

Table 5-25 DSCP Classification Mapping Parameters


Parameter Value Description
DSCP Value 0 to 63 DSCP values (0 to 63) in the User Frame Header.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Assign the Internal Priority (0 to 7) to each DSCP
value.

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-158 Information Dialog Box

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-92 DETAIL SETUP

The QoS/Classification Setting (Classify Setting tab) window updates the


information.

10. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 5-159 QoS Classification Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-93

(3) Ingress Setting Tab

(a) Add Policer Index

Procedure 5-33
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Add Policer Index button:

Ingress Setting tab

Add Policer Index button

Figure 5-160 QoS/Classification Setting Window


The Add Policer Index option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-94 DETAIL SETUP

4. Create the police index:

Figure 5-161 Add Policer Index Option Window

Table 5-26 Add Policer Index Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Policer Index 1 to 256 Specify the Policer index number.
Item (available card) Select a name of the target card.
Port (available port) Select a port.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specify the internal priority.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 16 Specify the Policer Profile number to apply.
VLAN ID (check box) Enable VLAN ID option box below.
Enable (radio button) Click to enable a policer.

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-95

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-162 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.

6. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:

Figure 5-163 QoS/Classification Setting Window — Ingress Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-96 DETAIL SETUP

(b) Set Ingress Policer Profile Details

Procedure 5-34
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click the Ingress Policer Profile
Setting button:

Ingress Setting tab

Ingress Policer Profile Setting button

Figure 5-164 QoS/Classification Setting Window

The Ingress Policer Profile Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-97

4. Click the No. of the target Ingress Policer Profile Index:

Figure 5-165 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window


The Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting option window appears.

Figure 5-166 Ingress Policer Profile Detail Setting Option Window

Table 5-27 Ingress Policer Detail Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
EIR 0 to 1000000 Enter the maximum bandwidth. [unit: kbps]
CIR 0 to 1000000 Enter the minimum guaranteed bandwidth. [unit: kbps}
EBS 0 to 128 Enter the maximum burst size. [unit: kbyte]
CBS 1 to 64 Enter the minimum burst size. [unit: kbyte]

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-98 DETAIL SETUP

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-167 Information Dialog Box


The Ingress Policer Profile Setting option window updates the information.

7. Verify the contents, then click the OK button.

Figure 5-168 Ingress Policer Profile Setting Option Window

Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-99

8. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-169 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) updates the information.

9. Verify the newly added ingress policer index:

Figure 5-170 QoS/Classification Setting Window — Ingress Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-100 DETAIL SETUP

(c) Modify Policer Index

Procedure 5-35
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index number
of the target object:

Ingress Setting tab

Policer Index numbers

Figure 5-171 QoS/Classification Setting Window


Ingress Policer Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-101

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 5-172 Ingress Policer Setting Option Window

Table 5-28 Modify Policer Index Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Policer Index (read only) Indicates the selected Index number.
Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the internal priority.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 16 Specifies the policer profile number to be applied to the
port.
VLAN ID (check box) Enables/Disables the policer of selected VLANs below.
Enable (radio button) Enables to set VLAN Service Name.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-173 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the
information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-102 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify that the selected object is modified.

Figure 5-174 Qos/Classification Setting Window - Ingress Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

(d) Delete Ingress Policer Index

Procedure 5-36
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-103

3. Click to select the Ingress Setting tab, then click to select a Policer Index number
of the target object:

Ingress Setting tab

Delete Policer Index button

Figure 5-175 QoS/Classification Setting Window - Ingress Setting Tab


Delete Policer Index option window appears.

4. Enter the Ingress Policer Index No. to be removed, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-176 Delete Policer Index Setting Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-104 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button.

Figure 5-177 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-178 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Ingress Setting tab) window updates the
information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-105

7. Verify that the selected object is removed.

Figure 5-179 QoS/Classification Setting Window - Ingress Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

(4) Port Setting Tab

Procedure 5-37
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/Classification Setting
window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-106 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click to select the Port Setting tab, then click on the Class Mode to open the Class
Mode Setting option window.

Port Setting

Class Mode

Figure 5-180 QoS/Classification Setting Window — Port Setting Tag


4. Select a Class Mode by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-181 Class Mode Setting Option Window

Table 5-29 Class Mode Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Class Mode 4 Class QoS Sets an output queue to 4 Class. [default]
8 Class QoS Sets an output queue to 8 Class.

Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-107

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-182 Information Dialog Box


The Class Mode Setting option window closes.

6. Click a Port number of the target:

Port numbers

Figure 5-183 QoS/Classification Setting Window


QoS Port Setting option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-108 DETAIL SETUP

7. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-184 QoS Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-30 QoS Port Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Port Setting
Scheduling Mode 4xSP Queuing modes for 4-Class QoS.
1xSP+3xDWRR [SP: Strict-Priority; DWRR: Deficit Weighted Round Robin]
4xDWRR
1xSP+7xDWRR Queuing modes for 8-Class QoS.
2xSP+6xDWRR
Drop Mode WTD WTD (Weighted Tail Drop) sets the port to discard packets at
the tail end of the queue if the queue exceeds the specified
threshold.
WRED WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) sets the port to
randomly discards packets of traffic with the priority lower than
one with higher priority when queue exceeds the specified
threshold.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-109

Parameter Value Description


Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 1000 Sets the maximum rate at outputs for the egress queue. [unit:
Mbit/s]
Internal Priority Queueing Policy per Ingress Port
Internal Priority 0 0 to 7 Specifies the priority of ingress ports.
Class
to
Internal Priority 7
Class
Egress Class Setting Information
Class 0 (linked if Clicking the linked Class n opens Egress Class Setting option
to available) window (Figure 5-186 Information Dialog Box).
Class 7

Figure 5-185 Egress Class Setting Option Window


See Table 5-31 below.
Shaper Rate (read only) Indicates the specified data.
DWRR Weight (read only) Indicates the specified data.

Table 5-31 Egress Class Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Shaper Rate 0.001 to 1000 Specifies the maximum rate at output for the class.
[unit: Mbit/s]
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Specifies the weight of the queue.
Queue Length 16 to 128 Specifies the length for each queue. [unit: kbyte]
Values for Queues 6 and 7 are fixed to 16 kbytes.
WTD Yellow Frame 10 to 100 Sets the threshold of Yellow Frame.
Threshold
WRED Yellow Frame 10 to 100 Determines the threshold value for Yellow Frame.
Threshold
WRED Green Frame 10 to 100 Determines the threshold value for Green Frame.
Threshold

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-110 DETAIL SETUP

8. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

9. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-186 Information Dialog Box


The QoS Port Setting option window updates the window.

10. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-187 QoS Port Setting Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-111

11. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-188 Information Dialog Box


The QoS/Classification Setting (Port Setting tab) window updates the information.

12. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-189 QoS/Classification Setting Window — Port Setting Tab


This step ends the procedure.

5.3.9 Other ETH Port Setting


Procedure 5-38
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Other ETH Function Setting. The Other ETH Port Setting
window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-112 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click to select a port number of the target object:

Port numbers

Figure 5-190 Other ETH Port Setting Window


Other ETH Port Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-191 Other ETH Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-32 Other ETH Port Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Port Information
Media Type (read only) Indicates the media type of the selected port.
Speed (read only) Indicates the currently selected speed at the selected port.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-113

Parameter Value Description


Monitoring Monitoring Sets the port to be monitored.
Mirror Sets the port as the Mirror Port. The traffic of the monitored
port will be duplicated onto this port.
Disable Disables the monitoring function.
Monitoring Direction Ingress Sets to monitor the ingress traffic of the port.
Egress Sets to monitor the egress traffic of the port.
Both Sets to monitor both the ingress and egress traffics.
L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel Enable (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to enable the PDU of
the protocol transparent without processing.

NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel option is not supported for the RSTP enabled ports.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-192 Information Dialog Box


The Other ETH Port Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-193 Other ETH Port Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-114 DETAIL SETUP

5.3.10 LLF Setting

(a) Add LLF Group

Procedure 5-39
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.

3. Click the Add LLF button:

Add LLF button

Figure 5-194 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting (Add) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-115

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-195 LLF Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-33 LLF Setting (Add) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Specifies the LLF Group ID Number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects the target card.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.
Disable Disables sending the LLF Signals.
Ignore Received LLF Signal Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the
port as Edge Port.

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-116 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-196 Information Dialog Box


The LLF Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-197 LLF Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Modify LLF Group

Procedure 5-40
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-117

3. Click an LLF GRP ID number of the target LLF:

LLF GRP ID numbers

Figure 5-198 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-199 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-118 DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-34 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
LLF GRP ID (read only) Indicates the selected LLF GRP ID number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available card) Selects to change the target card.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.
Disable Disables sending the LLF Signals.
Ignore Received LLF Signal Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set the
port as Edge Port.

When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-200 Information Dialog Box


The LLF Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-201 LLF Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-119

(c) Delete LLF Group

Procedure 5-41
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.

3. Click the Delete LLF button:

Delete LLF button

Figure 5-202 LLF Setting Window


LLF Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select the LLF GRP ID number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button:

Figure 5-203 LLF Setting (Delete) Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-120 DETAIL SETUP

5. Click the OK button.

Figure 5-204 Confirmation Dialog box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-205 Information Dialog Box


The LLF Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-206 LLF Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-121

5.3.11 Broadcast Storm Control Setting


Following procedure sets the input rate for the broadcast storm control, and enables/disable the
Broadcast Storm Control per Ethernet port (including MODEM port).

Procedure 5-42
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast Storm Control
Setting window appears.

3. Click the Broadcast Storm Control Rate.

Broadcast Storm Control Race

Figure 5-207 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window

The Broadcast Storm Control Rate option window appears.

4. Specify the input rate of the target frames for Broadcast Storm Control, then click
the OK button:

Figure 5-208 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-122 DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-35 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Broadcast Storm Control Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Sets the input rate of the frame for the Broadcast
Storm Control. [granularity: 1 Mbps]

Information dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-209 Information Dialog Box


The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.

6. Click the target Port Number link to set the Broadcast Storm Control usage:

Port Number

Figure 5-210 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window


Broadcast Storm Control option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-123

7. Set Enable or Disable the Broadcast Storm Control by clicking its radio button,
then click the OK button:

Figure 5-211 Broadcast Storm Control Option Window


Information dialog box appears.

8. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-212 Information Dialog Box


The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information.

9. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-213 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-124 DETAIL SETUP

5.4 Configure Crossconnection


5000iPS supports the crossconnection configured using E1 Ports and STM-1 Ports. The
E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting menu provides the following options:

 E1 Port Setting
Sets E1 Port by specifying E1 Port Name, E1 CH Usage, Channel Impedance and
unused CH reports.
 STM-1 Port Setting
Sets STM-1 Port by specifying STM-1 Port Mode, Usage, TIM ALM and ALS
(Automatic Laser Shutdown).
 Cross Connect Setting
Configures the Cross Connect, and confirms the current usage of Cross Connect and
Ports (CH).

5.4.1 E1 Port Setting


Procedure 5-43
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/Cross
Connect Setting to select E1 Port Setting. The E1 Port Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-214 E1 Port Setting Window


E1 Port Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-125

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-215 E1 Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-36 E1 Port Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Collective Setting: This option sets all ports to the same values. To set ports individually, use the options below
the Collective Setting options.
CH Usage Used All All E1 Channels are set to be used.
Not Used All All E1 Channels are set to be unused.
CH Usage Error Report Report All Allows to report a usage error if an unused E1 CH is detected
at the input signal.
Not Report All Disables to report a usage error for all E1 ports.
Impedance All CH 120 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 120 ohms.
All CH 75 Sets the impedance of all E1 Channels to 75 ohms.
CH Usage Used Sets to use the port.
Not Used Sets not to use the port.
CH Usage Error Report Report Enables to report the usage error if detecting an unused port.
Not Report Disables to report a usage error.
Impedance 120 Sets the port impedance to 120 ohms.
75 Sets the port impedance to 75 ohms.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-126 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


Port Name (text field) Specifies a name to the port. Valid value is at least one, up to
32 characters long.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-216 Information Dialog Box


The E1 Port Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-217 E1 Port Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-127

5.4.2 STM-1 Port Setting


Procedure 5-44
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/Cross
Connect Setting to select STM-1 Port Setting. The STM-1 Port Setting window
appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-218 STM-1 Port Setting Window


STM-1 Port Setting option window appears. Provided options differ depending on
the STM-1 Mode. STM-1 Modes are Through and Channelized:

 Through: The Through Mode transmits the STM-1 over the radio frame.

 Channelized: The Channelized Mode extracts the 63 E1 channels from the

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-128 DETAIL SETUP

STM-1 to use them selectively.


4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

(a) STM-1 Mode: Through

Figure 5-219 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Option Window

Table 5-37 STM-1 Port Setting (Through Mode) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


STM-1 Mode Through Indicates Through for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32 characters
long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting that
STM-1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and to output
MS-AIS.
Disable Disables this function.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60sec Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm is
180sec cleared.
300sec

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-129

Parameter Value Description


STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying out a
switching operation to prevent frequently executing the
switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a failure and
execution of the switch operation. [unit: minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in mode.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-130 DETAIL SETUP

(b) STM-1 Mode: Channelized

Figure 5-220 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode)

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-131

Table 5-38 STM-1 Port Setting (Channelized Mode) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


STM-1 Mode Channelized Indicates Channelized for STM-1 Mode.
Port Setting
Port Usage Used Sets to use the STM-1 Port.
Not Used Sets not to use the STM-1 Port.
Port Name (text filed) Specifies the Port Name using at least one, up to 32
characters long.
MS-AIS Generation Enable Enables the function to stop laser outputs if detecting
that STM-1 signal is lost (optical or radio) (RLOS), and
to output MS-AIS.
Disable Disables this function.
ALS Usage Enable Enables the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) function.
Disable Disables the ALS function.
ALS Interval 60sec Sets the delay time to release the ALS when the alarm
180sec is cleared.
300sec
Trace Setting
Trace Mode J0: Section Trace Enables to detect RS-TIM.
J1: High Order Path Enables to detect HP-TIM.
Trace
Trace Mismatch AIS Enable Enables the function to output AIS if detecting TIM.
Generation Action Disable Disables this function.
Section Trace Send 1 to 15 Sets J0 in the outgoing direction.
Expected Section Trace 1 to 15 Sets J0 in the incoming direction.
Higher Order Path Trace (disabled) (This option is disabled.)
Expected Higher Order (disabled) (This option is disabled.)
Path Trace
Received Trace Value
Received Section Trace (read only) Indicates the received Section Trace value.
Received High Order (read only) Indicates the received Higher-Order Path Trace value.
Path Trace
Radio Alarm Transfer Setting
Radio Alarm Transfer Enable Enables to transfer an alarm through E1 Channel with
STM-1 is configured as Channelized.
Disable Disables the function.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-132 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


STM-1 Switch Setting
Lock-in Usage Used Enables to pause for a period of time before carrying
out a switching operation to prevent frequently
executing the switching.
Not Used Disables this function.
Detection Time [min] 1 to 60 Sets the Lock-in period between the detection of a
failure and execution of the switch operation. [unit:
minute]
Detection Count [times] 1 to 255 Sets the threshold value to number of switch-over
times.
Clear Lock-in Time [min] 1 to 2880 Sets the duration period before clearing the Lock-in
mode.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-221 Information Dialog Box


The STM-1 Port Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-133

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-222 STM-1 Port Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-134 DETAIL SETUP

5.4.3 Cross Connect Setting


5000iPS supports the Cross Connection of 2M E1 and STM-1 (Through Mode) levels. Up to
168 Cross Connections in total can be created.

Following lists the interface cards that support the Cross Connections:

Table 5-39 Cross Connect Settings


Card Type Number of Number of Description
Cards per Ports per Card
MDP
MODEM-A Up to 12 152 ——
16E1-A Up to 14 16 ——
STM1-A (Channelized Mode) Up to 14 63 ——
STM1-A (Through Mode) Up to 14 1 As one 75xE1 Port.

See the following table for channel numbering of the Channelized STM-1:

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-135

Table 5-40 Channel Numbering of Channelized STM-1


STM-1 TUG- TUG- TU-12 STM-1 TUG- TUG- TU-12
Channelized 3# 2# # Channelized 3# 2# #
Port No. #K #L #M Port No. #K #L #M
1 1 1 1 34 1 5 2
2 2 1 1 35 2 5 2
3 3 1 1 36 3 5 2
4 1 2 1 37 1 6 2
5 2 2 1 38 2 6 2
6 3 2 1 39 3 6 2
7 1 3 1 40 1 7 2
8 2 3 1 41 2 7 2
9 3 3 1 42 3 7 2
10 1 4 1 43 1 1 3
11 2 4 1 44 2 1 3
12 3 4 1 45 3 1 3
13 1 5 1 46 1 2 3
14 2 5 1 47 2 2 3
15 3 5 1 48 3 2 3
16 1 6 1 49 1 3 3
17 2 6 1 50 2 3 3
18 3 6 1 51 3 3 3
19 1 7 1 52 1 4 3
20 2 7 1 53 2 4 3
21 3 7 2 54 3 4 3
22 1 1 2 55 1 5 3
23 2 1 2 56 2 5 3
24 3 1 2 57 3 5 3
25 1 2 2 58 1 6 3
26 2 2 2 59 2 6 3
27 3 2 2 60 3 6 3
28 1 3 2 61 1 7 3
29 2 3 2 62 2 7 3
30 3 3 2 63 3 7 3
31 1 4 2
32 2 4 2 ———
33 3 4 2

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-136 DETAIL SETUP

(1) Add Cross Connect Assignment

(a) Non-Protection Mode

Procedure 5-45
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/Cross
Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect Setting
window appears.

3. Click the Add button to create a new Cross Connection:

Add button

Figure 5-223 Cross Connect Setting Window


Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-137

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-224 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-41 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Service No. 1 to 168 Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This
field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge A
Protection (check box) Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.
——— (available port) Select a port for Edge A. NOTE
Edge B
Protection (check box) Do not check (not to leave a tick in) the check box for
Non-Protection setting.
——— (available port) Select a port for Edge B. NOTE
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Verify the channel number and modularization related
to the current assignment.

NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel spacing.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-138 DETAIL SETUP

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-225 Information Dialog Box


The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-226 Cross Connect Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Protection Mode

Procedure 5-46
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand E1/STM-1/Cross
Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross Connect Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-139

3. Click the Add button to create a new Cross Connection:

Add button

Figure 5-227 Cross Connect Setting Window


Cross Connect Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-228 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-140 DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-42 Cross Connect Setting (Add) Option Window


Parameter Value Description
Service No. 1 to 168 Enter Service Number of the Cross Connection.
Service Name (text field) Enter the Service Name within 32 characters long. This
field can be left vacant (0 character) as well.
Cross Connect Type E1 Selects the crossconnection of E1 level.
STM-1 (Through) Selects the crossconnection of STM-1 Through level.
Edge A
Protection (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the
Protection. Checking this box enables the option box
below.
——— (available port) Select a port for Edge A, Term1/Term2. NOTE
Edge B
Protection (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to configure the
Protection. Checking this box enables the option box
below.
——— (available port) Select a port for Edge B, Term1/Term2. NOTE
AMR Linkage (hyperlink) Verify the channel number and modularization related to
the current assignment.

NOTE: Port numbers of Edge A/B appear different depending on the channel spacing.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-229 Information Dialog Box


The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-141

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-230 Cross Connect Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(2) Modify (Edit) Cross Connect Assignment

Procedure 5-47
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand


E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross
Connect Setting window appears.

3. Click the Service No. of the target Cross Connect.

Service Numbers

Figure 5-231 Cross Connect Setting Window

Cross Connect Setting (Modify) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-142 DETAIL SETUP

4. Modify parameters:

Figure 5-232 Cross Connect Setting (Modify) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-233 Information Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-143

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-234 Cross Connect Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(3) Delete Cross Connect Assignment

Procedure 5-48
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand


E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting to select Cross Connect Setting. The Cross
Connect Setting window appears.

3. Click the Delete button:

Delete button

Figure 5-235 Cross Connect Setting Window


Cross Connect Setting (Delete) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-144 DETAIL SETUP

4. Check (click to leave a tick in) the check box of the target crossconnection:

Figure 5-236 Cross Connect Setting (Delete) Option Window

5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 5-237 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed:

Figure 5-238 Information Dialog Box


The Cross Connect Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-145

8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-239 Cross Connect Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-146 DETAIL SETUP

5.5 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization


The procedures here sets the Internal/External Clock and the Timing Source Selection of the
equipment. The EXT Clock Setting menu provides the following menu:

 Equipment Clock Setting


Selects the Clock and Timing Source.
 EXT Clock Setting
Sets the CLK Output parameters.

5.5.1 Set Equipment Clock


Procedure 5-49
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Equipment Clock Setting. The
Equipment Clock Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-240 Equipment Clock Setting Window


Equipment Clock Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-147

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-241 Equipment Clock Setting Option Window

Table 5-43 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Equipment CLK Mode Master Sets the equipment clock as the Master
Clock to provide timing signals to
synchronize Slave Clocks.
Slave Sets the equipment clock as a Slave Clock to
be synchronized with the Master Clock.
Sync ETH Enable Enables the Synchronous Ethernet function.
Disable Disables the Synchronous Ethernet function.
Clock Source Selective QL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its quality
Mode level.
PL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its priority
level.
Timing Source 1 No Entry Select a clock source.
Line CLK1/2
2 GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK (STM1)
3 No Entry
EXT CLK
Slot (available slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port/CH (available port #) Select a Port number of the target that can
extract the clock information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-148 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


Priority Level 1 to 12 Sets the priority of the timing source
manually.
SSM Usage Used Sets to use the Line SSM.
Not Used Sets not to use the Line SSM.
Forced SSM Value QL-PRC Sets the Primary Reference Clock.
QL-SSU-A
QL-SSU-B
QL-SEC
WTR 0 Sets the Wait to Restore time that is a period
10 s to wait for enabling the timing source when
20 s recovered.
30 s
1 min to 15 min (by the minute)

5. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 5-242 Warning Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-243 Information Dialog Box


The Equipment Clock Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-149

8. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-244 Ext Clock Setting Window

This step ends the procedure.

5.5.2 Set EXT Clock


Procedure 5-50
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Equipment
Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Ext Clock Setting. The Ext Clock
Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-245 Ext Clock Setting Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-150 DETAIL SETUP

Ext Clock Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 5-246 Ext Clock Setting Option Window

Table 5-44 Ext Clock Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
In/Out
EXT Impedance 120  Selects the impedance of EXT CLK.
75 
EXT CLK Interface bps Selects EXT CLK by bit/s or Hertz
Hz
CRC On/Off On
Off
SSM Support Enable Supports SSM.
Disable Disables SSM usage.
Sa Bit Sa4 to Sa8
Out
EXT CLK Out SEL NOT SELECT Select a CLK type. Selecting NOT SELECT
NE CLK disables CLK outputs.
MODEM1
MODEM2
GbE Line CLK
E1 Line CLK
Option Line CLK

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-151

Parameter Value Description


Slot (available Slot #) Select a Slot number of the target object.
Port/CH (available Port/CH #) Select a Port or CH number.
Message Pass Through On
Off
Threshold AIS On
Generation Mode Off
QL Threshold QL-PRC
AIS Generation Mode AIS
Shutdown
Timing Loop Prevention On
Off

NOTE: Port/CH numbers cannot be changed when the same interface is already used by the
equipment clock setting.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-247 Information Dialog Box


The Ext Clock Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-152 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-248 Ext Clock Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-153

5.6 Assign STM-1 (Through) Port for V.11/OW


Use the following procedures to assign the user interface (V.11, RS-232C) and Orderwire
Channel:

 V.11/SC Control Setting


Select the input of SC Channel, RS-232C, and V.11 from the SC channel of each
MODEM.
 V.11 Directional Setting
Set the working mode of V.11.
 OW Setting
Set the Orderwire Channel of the radio section and CALL OUT polarity.

5.6.1 V.11/SC Setting

(1) Assign SC Channel Usage

Procedure 5-51
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.

3. Click the SC Channel link:

SC Channel

Figure 5-249 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-154 DETAIL SETUP

4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and set an SC Channel to the appropriate
port:

 Item: MODEM  Item: STM1-A

Figure 5-250 V.11/SC Setting (SC Channel) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-251 Information Dialog Box


The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-252 Equipment Clock Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-155

(2) Set for MODEM

Procedure 5-52
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.

3. Click the MODEM link:

MODEM

Figure 5-253 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (MODEM) option window appears.

4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:

 From MODEM  From MODEM to STM1-A

Figure 5-254 V.11/SC Setting (MODEM) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-156 DETAIL SETUP

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-255 Information Dialog Box


The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-256 V.11/SC Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-157

(3) Set for STM1-A

Procedure 5-53
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11/SC Setting. The V.11/SC Setting window appears.

3. Click the STM1-A link:

STM1-A

Figure 5-257 V.11/SC Setting Window


V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-158 DETAIL SETUP

4. Select a Card from Item drop-down list, and assign the appropriate usage:

Figure 5-258 V.11/SC Setting (STM1-A) Option Window


5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-259 Information Dialog Box


The V.11/SC Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-159

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-260 V.11/SC Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.6.2 Assign V.11 Directional Setting


Procedure 5-54
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select V.11 Directional Setting. The V.11 Directional Setting window
appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-160 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-261 V.11 Directional Setting Window


V.11 Directional Setting option window appears.

4. Set the appropriate direction:

Figure 5-262 V.11 Directional Setting Option Window

Table 5-45 V.11 Directional Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
V.11-1 Direction Setting Co-Directional The direction to receive data is the same as
V.11-2 Direction Setting that of the Clock Input/Output.
Contra-Directional The direction to receive data is the opposite to
that of the Clock Input/Output.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-263 Information Dialog Box


The V.11 Directional Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-161

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-264 Equipment Clock Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.6.3 Assign Orderwire Setting

(1) SW GRP1 (MODEM)

Procedure 5-55
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.

3. Click the MODEM link:

MODEM

Figure 5-265 OW Setting Window


OW Setting (MODEM) option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-162 DETAIL SETUP

4. Set the appropriate usage:

Figure 5-266 OW Setting Option Window

Table 5-46 OW Setting (MODEM) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
OW Use DSC Used Enables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.
Not Used Disables the use of OW Channel on the selected Card.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-267 Information Dialog Box


The OW Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-268 OW Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-163

(2) AUX/SWO

Procedure 5-56
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand V.11/OW
Setting to select OW Setting. The OW Setting window appears.

3. Click the AUX/SWO link:

AUX/SWO

Figure 5-269 OW Setting Window


OW Setting (AUX/SWPA) option window appears.

4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-270 OW Setting (AUX/SWO) Option Window

Table 5-47 OW Setting (AUX-A) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Call Polarity Invert Calls if a signal is not normal.
Normal Calls when a signal is normal.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-164 DETAIL SETUP

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-271 Information Dialog Box


The OW Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-272 OW Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-165

5.7 Configure Alarm/AIS Setting


Use the following procedures to configure the alarm severity, colors, and the relevant settings
of AIS events.

 Correlation Setting
Users can modify the conditions to mask alarms (if displaying/clearing alarms on LCT
or LED).
 Alarm Severity Setting
Users can modify the severity level of each alarm, such as critical, major, minor, and
warning, reported by 5000iPS.
 AIS Setting
Users can enable/disable AIS outputs, and specify the conditions if to output AIS and
delay time to output AIS.
 BER Threshold Setting
Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1 MUX input and E-BER/SD.

5.7.1 Correlation Settings


Procedure 5-57
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Correlation Setting. The Correlation Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-273 Correlation Setting Window


Correlation Setting option window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-166 DETAIL SETUP

4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-274 Correlation Setting Option Window

Table 5-48 Correlation Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Alarm Correlation On Enables to detect lower level alarms.
Off Disables to detect lower level alarms.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-275 Information Dialog Box


The Correlation Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-276 Correlation Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-167

5.7.2 AIS Setting


Procedure 5-58
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select AIS Setting. The AIS Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-277 AIS Setting Window


AIS Setting option window appears.

4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 5-278 AIS Setting Option Window

Table 5-49 AIS Setting Parameters

Parameter Value Description


AIS Activation Condition LOF + High BER Sends AIS by receiving LOF and High BER alarms.
(Radio) LOF Sends AIS by receiving LOF signal only.
AIS Generated Report Report Reports the event of generated AIS.
(E1/STM-1) Not Report Not to report the event of generated AIS.
AIS Received Report (E1) Report Reports the event of receiving AIS.
Not Report Not to report the event of receiving AIS.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-168 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


AIS Received Condition (E1) Alarm Treats an event of receiving AIS as an alarm.
Status Treats an event of receiving AIS as no alarm (event).

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-279 Information Dialog Box


The AIS Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-280 AIS Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.7.3 BER Threshold Setting


Use the following procedures to specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)/STM-1
MUX input and E-BER/SD.

(1) Switch Group 1 (MODEM)

Procedure 5-59
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window
appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-169

3. Click the desired MODEM link:

links to obgects’ option windows

Figure 5-281 BER Threshold Setting Window


BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-282 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Option Window

Table 5-50 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of Microwave.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of Microwave
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-170 DETAIL SETUP

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-283 Information Dialog Box


The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-284 BER Threshold Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(2) STM1-A

Procedure 5-60
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window
appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-171

3. Click the desired STM1-A link:

links to obgects’ option windows

Figure 5-285 BER Threshold Setting Window


BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-286 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Option Window

Table 5-51 BER Threshold Setting (STM1-A) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
RS-EXC 1E-3 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator
1E-4 Section Signal Excessive BER condition.
1E-5
RS-DEG 1E-6 Specifies the threshold value to detect Regenerator
1E-7 Section Signal Degrade condition.
1E-8
1E-9

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-172 DETAIL SETUP

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-287 Information Dialog Box


The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-288 BER Threshold Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-173

5.8 Assign PMON/RMON Settings


Use the following procedures to set the relevant configuration of PMON (except Ethernet port)
and RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold values.

The PMON/RMON Setting provides the following menus:

 PMON Threshold Setting


Threshold setting of PMON (except Ether port).
 PMON Other
Threshold setting of TCN level.
 RMON Threshold Setting
Threshold setting of RMON (Ether port).
 RMON Other
Add the VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report).

5.8.1 PMON Threshold Setting


PMON/RMON Threshold values can be set to the following objects:

 MODEM: for a slot (Card) that does not configure Switch Group.
 SW GRP: for slots (Cards) that configure a Switch Group.
 APS GRP
 STM1-A
 16E1-A

(1) MODEM / SW GRP (Slot No.) Tab

Procedure 5-61
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting
window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-174 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click the desired MODEM or SW GRP (for protected slots) tab:

click tab

Figure 5-289 PMON Threshold Setting Window


RF - MODEM or RF - SW GRP option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-290 RF - MODEM Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-175

Table 5-52 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters


Parameter Value Description
RF 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
BBE condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
SES condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
SEP condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-176 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


RF 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
UAS condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
RF 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
OFS condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-291 Information Dialog Box


The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-177

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-292 PMON Threshold Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

(2) APS GRP Tab

Procedure 5-62
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold Setting
window appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-178 DETAIL SETUP

3. Click the desired APS GRP tab:

APS GRP tab

Figure 5-293 PMON Threshold Setting Window


DMR - APS GRP or RS - APS GRP option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-294 DMR - APS GRP Option Window

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-179

Table 5-53 PMON Threshold Setting (DMR - APS GRP Tab) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
DMR 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
RS condition for a 15-Minute period.
BBE Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
RS ES condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
RS condition for a 15-Minute period.
SES Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
RS condition for a 15-Minute period.
SEP Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-180 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


DMR 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
RS condition for a 15-Minute period.
UAS Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
DMR 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
RS condition for a 15-Minute period.
OFS Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.

Figure 5-295 RS - APS GRP Option Window

Table 5-54 PMON Threshold Setting (RS - APS GRP Tab) Parameters
Parameter Value Description
RS BBE 15min Occur 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 1611000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 154656000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE
condition for a 1-Day period.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-181

Parameter Value Description


RS ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS
condition for a 1-Day period.
RS OFS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
for a 15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS
condition for a 1-Day period.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-182 DETAIL SETUP

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-296 Information Dialog Box


The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-297 PMON Threshold Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-183

5.8.2 PMON Other


Procedure 5-63
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select PMON Other. The PMON Other window appears.

3. Click the target MODEM link:

link to option windows

Figure 5-298 PMON Other Window


PMON Other Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-299 PMON Other Setting Option Window

Table 5-55 PMON Other Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
RX Level TCN Threshold –99 to –30 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN RX
Level alarm. [unit: dBm]

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-184 DETAIL SETUP

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-300 Information Dialog Box


The PMON Other Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-301 PMON Other Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.8.3 RMON Threshold Setting


Procedure 5-64
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Threshold Setting. The RMON Threshold Setting
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-185

3. Click the Modify button:

Modify button

Figure 5-302 RMON Threshold Setting Window


RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-303 RMON Threshold Setting Option Window

Table 5-56 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
RX Drop Events 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Drop Event condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Drop Events condition for a 1-day period.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-186 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value Description


RX Undersize Pkts 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Undersize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Undersize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
RX Fragments 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Fragments condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Fragments condition for a 1-day period.
RX CRC Alignment 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Errors CRC Alignment Error for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
CRC Alignment Error for a 1-day period.
RX Oversize Pkts 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Oversize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX
Oversize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
TX Collisions 15 min 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX
collision for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX
collision for a 1-day period.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-304 Information Dialog Box


The RMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-187

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-305 RMON Threshold Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5.8.4 RMON Other

(a) Add VLAN Counter

Procedure 5-65
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.

3. Click the VLAN counter No. link on the VLAN Counter Select tab:

VLAN Counter numbers

Figure 5-306 RMON Other Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-188 DETAIL SETUP

VLAN Counter Select option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-307 VLAN Counter Select Option Window

Table 5-57 VLAN Counter Select Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Item (available card) Select the target card to specify.
Port (available port) Select the target port to specify.
Enable (radio button) Clicking the radio button enables to count the frames
that pass through the selected VLAN.

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-308 Information Dialog Box


The RMON Other window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-189

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-309 RMON Other Window


This step ends the procedure.

(b) Delete VLAN Counter

Procedure 5-66
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand PMON/RMON
Setting to select RMON Other. The RMON Other window appears.

3. Click the Delete VLAN Counter button:

Detele VLAN Counter button

Figure 5-310 RMON Other Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-190 DETAIL SETUP

The Delete VLAN Counter option window appears.

4. Select a VLAN Counter No. to be removed, then click the OK button:

Figure 5-311 VLAN Counter Select Option Window


Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 5-312 Confirmation Dialog Box


Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-313 Information Dialog Box


The RMON Other window updates the information.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-191

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-314 RMON Other Window


This step ends the procedure.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-192 DETAIL SETUP

5.9 AUX Setting


AUX Setting provides the following menus:

 AUX Input Setting


 AUX Output Setting

5.9.1 AUX Input Setting


Procedure 5-67
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting to
select AUX Input Setting. The AUX Input Setting window appears.

3. Click the Modify button of the target Input tab:

Modify button

Figure 5-315 AUX Input Setting Window


AUX Input Setting option window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-193

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-316 AUX Input Setting Option Window

Table 5-58 AUX Input Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Name (text field) Enter the event name within one to 32 characters
long, which is to be displayed in the Event Log.
Condition Alarm when Event On(Close) Reports an alarm when Event On.
Alarm when Event Off(Open) Reports an alarm when Event Off.
Status Reports the status information instead of an alarm.
Status Strings
Event On (Close) (text field) Enter the event name to be displayed when the event
Event Off (Open) (text field) status changes.
X.733
Severity Critical Specifies an alarm severity level.
Major
Minor
Warning
Alarm Type (see Table 5-59) Specifies an alarm type name.
Probable Cause (see Table 5-60) Specifies a probable cause of the event.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-194 DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-59 AUX Input Setting Alarm Types


Parameter Value
X.733 Alarm Type communicationAlarm
qualityOfServiceAlarm
processingErrorAlarm
equipmentAlarm
environmentalAlarm
integrityViolationAlarm
operationalViolationAlarm
physicalViolationAlarm
securityViolationAlarm
timeDomainVilolationAlarm

Table 5-60 AUX Input Setting Probable Causes


Parameter Value
X.733 Probable Causes aIS
 callSetUpFailure
 degradedSignal
 farEndReceiverFailure
 framingError
 lossOfFrame
 lossOfPointer
 lossOfSignal
 payloadTypeMismatch
 transmissionError
 remoteAlarmInterface
 excessiveBER
 pathTraceMismatch
 unavailable
 signalCableMismatch
 lossOfMulriFrame
 receiveFailure
 transmitFailure
 modulationFailure
demodulationFailure
 broadcastChannelFailure
 connectionEstablishmentError
 invalidMessageReceived

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-195

Parameter Value
 localNodeTransmissionError
 remoteNodeTransmissionError
 routingFailure
 backplaneFailure
 dataSetProblem
 equipmentIdentifierDuplication
 externalIFDeveiceProblem
 lineCardProblem
 multiplexerProblem
 nEIdentifierDuplication
 powerProblem
 processorProblem
 receiverFailure
 replaceableUnitMissing
 synchronizationSourceMismatch
 terminalProblem
 timingProblem
 transmitterFailure
 trunkCardProblem
 replaceableUnitProblem
 realTimeClockFailure
 antennaFailure
 batteryChargingFailure
 diskFailure
 FrequencyHoppingFailure
 iODeviceError
 lossOfSynchronisation
 lossOfRedundancy
 powerSupplyFailure
 signalQualityEveluationFailure
tranceiverFailure
 protectionMechanismFailure
 protectingResourceFailure
 airCompressorFailure
 airConditioningFailure
 airDryerFailure
 batteryDischarging
 batteryFailure

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-196 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value
 commercialPowerFailure
 coolingFanFailure
 engineFailure
 fireDetectorFailure
 FuseFailure
 generatorFailure
 lowBatteryThreshold
 pumpFailure
 rectifierFailure
 rectifierHighVoltage
 rectifierLowFVoltage
 ventilationsSystemFailure
 enclosureDoorOpen
 explosiveGas
 fire
 flood
 highHumidity
 highTemperature
 highWind
 iceBuildUp
 intrusionDetection
 lowFuel
 lowHumidity
 lowCablePressure
 lowTemperature
 lowWater
smoke
 toxicGas
 coolingSystemFailure
 externalEquipmentFailure
 externalPointFailure
 storageCabacityProblem
 memoryMismatch
 corruptData
 outOfCPUCydes
 sfwrEnvironmentProblem
 sfwrDownloadFailure
 lossOfRealTimel

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-197

Parameter Value
 applicationSubsystemFailure
 databaseInconsistency
 fileError
 outOfMemory
 softwareError
 timeoutExpired
 underlayingResourceUnavailable
 versionMismatch
 bandwidthReduced
 congestion
 excessiveErrorRate
 excessiveResponseTime
 excessiveRetransmissionRate
 reducedLoggingCapbility
 systemResourcesOverload
 adapterError
 applicationSubsystemFailure
 bandwidthReducedX733
 callEstablishmentError
 communicationsProtocolError
 communicationsSubsystemFailure
 configurationOrCustomizationError
congestionX733
 coruptData
 corruptData
 cpuCycleslimitExceeded
 dataSetOrModemError
 degradedSignalX733
 dteDceInterfaceError
 enclosureDoorOpenX733
 equipmentVibration
 fileErrorX733
 direDetected
 framingErrorX733
 heatingVentCoolingSystemProblem
 humidityUnacceptable
 inputOutputDeviceError
 inputDeticeError

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-198 DETAIL SETUP

Parameter Value
 lanError
 leakDetected
 localNodeTransmissionErrorX733
 lossOfFrameX733
 lossOfSignalX733
 materialSupplyExhausted
 multiplexerProblemX733
 outOfMemoryX733
 outputDeviceError
 performanceDegraded
 powerProblems
 pressureUnacceptable
 processorProblems
 pumpFailureX733‘
 queueSizeExceeded
 receiveFailureX733
 receiverFailureX733
 remoteNodeTransmissionErrorX733
resourceAtOrNearingCapacity
 responseTimeExcessive
 retransmissionRateExcessive
 softwareErrorX733
 softwareProgramAbnormallyTerminated
 softwareProgramError
 storageCapacityProblemX733
 temperatureUnacceptable
 thresholdCrossed
 timingProblemX733
 toxicLeakDetected
 transmitFailureX733
 transmitterFailure
 underlyingResourceUnavailable
 versionMismatchX733
 authenticationFailure
 breachOfConfidentiality
 cableTamper
 delayedInformation
 denialOfService

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-199

Parameter Value
 duplicateInformation
 iniformatinMissing
 informationModificationDetected
 informationOutOfSequence
 keyExpired
 nonRepudiationFailure
 outOfHoursActivity
 outOfService
 proceduralError
 unauthorizedAccessAttempt
 unexpectedInformation
 other

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-317 Information Dialog Box


The AUX Input Setting window updates the information.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-200 DETAIL SETUP

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-318 AUX Input Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


DETAIL SETUP 5-201

5.9.2 AUX Output Setting


Procedure 5-68
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand AUX Setting to
select AUX Output Setting. The AUX Output Setting window appears.

3. Click the target Output number:

Output numbers

Figure 5-319 AUX Output Setting Window


AUX Output Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings:

Figure 5-320 AUX Output Setting Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


5-202/END DETAIL SETUP

Table 5-61 AUX Output Setting Parameters


Parameter Value Description
Name (text field) Enter the event name within one to 32 characters long.
Condition Event Off(Open) Outputs a control signal when the Event is off.
Event On(Close) Outputs a control signal when the Event is on.
Status Strings
Event On (Close) (text field) Enter the event name.
Event Off (Open) (text field)

5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Figure 5-321 Information Dialog Box


The AUX Output Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed information.

Figure 5-322 AUX Output Setting Window


This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-1

6. OPERATION MONITORING

6.1 General
In Service monitoring is regularly operated by WebLCT. And when an alarm occurs, it will be
indicated as the LED lighting at the front of modules. Moreover, the performance monitor
function is equipped for traffic condition analysis.

6.2 Overview
Current Status window of the WebLCT displays the equipment status, Line Card status, event
logs and alarms detected by the equipment.

The window displays the view-only information; no modification is available.

6.3 View Current Status

6.3.1 Display Current Status Window

Procedure 6-1

 From starting up the WebLCT:


1. Launch and log in to WebLCT. The initial (main) window of the WebLCT
displays the Current Status information.

 From other task window:


1. Click the Current Status on top of the MENU frame in the left. The main
window in the right shows the Current Status information.

The Current Status window provides the information on the following objects separated by
tabs on which their items are indicated:

 Active Alarm

 Event Log

 Modem

 TRP

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-2 OPERATION MONITORING

 MDP

 E1

 STM-1

 GbE

 AUX

6.3.2 Active Alarm Tab

6.3.2.1 Active Alarm Tabbed Window


The Active Alarm tabbed window displays all the current alarms that have been detected by
the equipment.

The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To save the
information, click the Save button located within the Active Alarm list. See 6.3.2.2 for an
example.

Save button

Figure 6-1 Current Status Window - Active Alarm Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-3

6.3.2.2 Save the Displayed Information

Procedure 6-2

1. Click the Save button. File Download option window appears.

2. Click the Save button:

Figure 6-2 File Download Option Window

Save As option window appears.

3. Specify the directory to save the information, then click the Save button:

Figure 6-3 Save As Option Window

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-4 OPERATION MONITORING

 A file name is specified by default using the name of information type and saving date,
e.g., an example above shows that the Active Alarm data is saved on October 8th,
2010 at 12:59:34 pm. [ActiveAlarm_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv, where YYYY in-
dicates the year using four digits, MM indicates the month, DD indicates the day, hh
indicates the hour, mm indicates the minute, and ss indicates the second.]
4. When the process is completed, the Download complete window appears. Click the
Close button of the window.

Figure 6-4 Do wnload completed Window

5. Check the specified directory for the data if they are properly saved.

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-5

6.3.3 Event Log Tab


The Event Log tabbed window displays the information of all the detected alarms and status,
including any changes made to the Line Cards and the equipment configuration.

The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To save the
information, click the Save button located within the Event Log list.

Save button
Event Log tab

Figure 6-5 Current Status Window - Event Log Tab

NOTE: To save the log list, refer to the procedure provided in 6.3.2.2 Save the Displayed In-
formation.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-6 OPERATION MONITORING

6.3.4 MODEM Tab


The MODEM tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
MODEM Card(s) and by TRP.

Clicking the MODEM tab adds another row of related tabs.

MODEM tab

Figure 6-6 Current Status Window - MODEM Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-7

6.3.5 TRP Tab


The TRP tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
MODEM Card(s) and by TRP.

Clicking the TRP tab adds another row of related tabs.

TRP tab

Figure 6-7 Current Status Window - TRP Tab

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-8 OPERATION MONITORING

6.3.6 MDP Tab


The MDP tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from MDP.

MDP tab

Figure 6-8 Current Status Window - MDP Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-9

6.3.7 E1 Tab
The E1 tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status of 16E1-A Card.

Clicking the E1 tab adds another row of related tabs.

E1 tab

Figure 6-9 Current Status Window - E1 Tab

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-10 OPERATION MONITORING

6.3.8 STM-1 Tab


The STM-1 tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
STM1-A Card.

Clicking the STM-1 tab adds another row of related tabs.

STM-1 tab

Figure 6-10 Current Status Window - STM-1 Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-11

6.3.9 GbE Tab


The GbE tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from GbE-A
Card.

Clicking the GbE tab adds another row of related tabs.

GbE tab

Figure 6-11 Current Status Window - GbE Tab

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-12 OPERATION MONITORING

6.3.10 AUX Tab


The AUX tab displays the information of alarms and status of AUX.

AUX tab

Figure 6-12 Current Status Window - AUX Tab

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-13

6.4 Module Front LED, Interface, and Switches


The module failure and some operating conditions are indicated by the Module Front LED.

6.4.1 TRP

ALM (Red LED):


Lights when abnormal event has
occurred in this module.

TX LO MON:
Used for Transmitter local frequency
monitoring.

RF OUT:
Connected to Input of BR CKT.

RF IN:
Connected from Output of BR CKT.

RX LO OUT / MON:
When SD is not equipped, it is used for
Receiver local frequency monitoring.
When SD is equipped, it is connected to
LO IN of SD.

RX IF OUT:
When SD is not equipped, it is connected
to IF IN of TR INTFC.
When SD is equipped, it is connected to
MAIN IF IN of SD.

TX IF IN:
Connected from IF OUT of TR INTFC.

Figure 6-13 TRP Front View

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-14 OPERATION MONITORING

6.4.2 SD
ALM (Red LED):
Lights when abnormal event has occurred in

RF IN:
Connected to Output of BR CKT.

LO OUT / MON:
Used for Receiver local frequency monitorin

LO IN:
Connected to RX LO OUT of TRP.

MAIN IF IN:
Connected to RX IF OUT of TRP.

RX IF OUT:
Connected to IF IN of TR INTFC.

Figure 6-14 SD Card Controls and Indicators

6.4.3 TR INTFC
PWR (Green LED):
Lights when -48V DC Power Supply is fed.
ALM (Red LED):
Lights when abnormal event has occurred in this module.
IF OUT:
Connected to TX IF IN of TRP.
IF IN:
When SD is not equipped, it's connected from
RX IF OUT of TRP.
When SD is equipped, it's connected from
RX IF OUT of SD.
MAIN:
Used for Main receiver AGC voltage monitoring.
SD:
Used for SD receiver AGC voltage monitoring.
GND:
Ground terminal for AGC voltage monitoring.
-48V / ALM:
The -48V DC power supply input, and Module alarm
output.

Figure 6-15 TR INTFC Card Indicator

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-15

6.4.4 F AN Unit
ALM (Red LED):
Lights when abnormal event has
occurred in this module.

-48V / ALM:
The -48V DC power supply input,
and Module alarm output.

Figure 6-16 FAN Unit Control and Indicators

6.4.5 CON Board

Front view
[5000iPS Type] [5000S / IP Hybrid type

The 5000iPS is used to connect the TX RF


SW control signal in Hot Standby system.
The 5000S / IP Hybrid type is used to con-
nect the TX RF SW control signal in
Hot-Standby system, and Rack Top LED
control signal.

SW CTRL:
Connected to TX RF SW of Hot Standby
BR CKT

ALM:
Connected to Rack Top LED of 5000S
Rack.

Side view (Common) EXT:


Connected from EXT Port of AUX/SWO

Figure 6-17 CON Board Indicator

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-16 OPERATION MONITORING

6.4.6 MC-M

ALM (Red LED):


Lights when abnormal event has occurred MEM:
in this module. USB Memory device connection port.

ONLINE (Green LED): LCT:


Lights when online side of redundancy system. Web LCT connection port.

MAINT (Amber LED): 1 / 2 port:


Lights when set in Maintenance mode by Web LCT. LAN data connection port (RJ-45)

3 / 4 port:
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 (Green LED): LAN data connection port (with SFP Module)
Lights when applicable LAN port receives the
packet data. ALM / SC / CLK:
External alarm, Service channel, External
PROTECT: clock port
Protection mode switch for replacement.

EOW:
Engineering Orderwire Headset connection port.

CALL:
Engineering Orderwire Calling button.

Figure 6-18 MC-M Card Indicator

6.4.7 TERM-M

ALM (Red LED): NE1:


Lights when abnormal event has oc- Used to Supevision data branch connection.
curred in this module.
NMS: ALM / SC / CLK:
Connected to Network Management Service channel port
System, or
Supervision data branch connection.

Figure 6-19 TERM-M Indicators

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-17

6.4.8 MODEM-T

PWR (Green LED): MD / TRP PWR:


Lights when -48V DC Power Supply is fed to
this module. Power supply switch for MODEM and TRP.

TX (Green LED): IF:


Lights when TX IF output is ON.
Connected to IF of TR INTFC.
RX (Green LED):
Lights when RX BB SW selected side of
XIF IN:
redundancy system.
Connected from other MODEM in XPIC
ONLINE (Green LED): combination.
Lights when online side of redundancy
system. XIF OUT:
Connected to other MODEM in XPIC
ALM (Red LED):
combination.
Lights when abnormal event has occurred
in this module.

Figure 6-20 MODEM-T Indicator

6.4.9 GbE-A

ALM (Red LED): 1 / 2 port:


Lights when abnormal event has occurred in LAN data connection port (RJ-45)
this module.
3 / 4 port:
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 (Green LED): LAN data connection port (with SFP Module)
Lights when applicable LAN port receives the
packet data.

Figure 6-21 GbE-A Card Indicator

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-18 OPERATION MONITORING

6.4.10 STM1-A

ALM (Red LED): 1 / 2 port:


Lights when abnormal event has occurred in STM-1 data connection port (with SFP
this module. Module)

ONLINE 1 / 2 (Green LED):


Lights when applicable port receives the
STM-1 data.

Figure 6-22 STM1-A Card Indicator

6.4.11 16E1-A

ALM (Red LED): 2M IN / OUT:


Lights when abnormal event has occurred in E1 data connection port.
this module.

Figure 6-23 16E1-A Card Indicator

6.4.12 AUX/SWO

ALM (Red LED): ALM / EOW / NE2:


Lights when abnormal event has occurred in House keeping alarm port,
this module. Cluster alarm port,
External alarm port, and
EXT: Supervision data branch port
Connected to CON BOARD

Figure 6-24 AUX/SWO Indicator

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-19

6.4.13 PS-M

PWR (Green LED): -48V / G SELV:


Lights when -48V DC Power Supply is fed to Connected from Station Power Supply.
this module.
Figure 6-25 PS-M Indicator

6.4.14 FAN-M
ALM (Red LED):
Lights when fan revolution degrades to 70%.
When this alarm occurs, it should be ex-
change to new one as soon.

Figure 6-26 F AN-M Indicator

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-20 OPERATION MONITORING

6.5 Alarm Status

6.5.1 Alarm Class


5000iPS uses the following five classes as severity levels:

 CL [Cleared]:
CL indicates that one or more previously reported alarms has/have been cleared. This
state applies to all alarms detected for this managed object with the same alarm type,
probable cause and specific problems (if given). Multiple associated notifications may
be cleared by using the Correlated notifications parameter (defined below).

 ID [Indeterminate]:
ID indicates that the detected condition cannot be determined to classify the severity
level.

 CR [Critical]:
CR indicates for the Critical Alarm that causes a service affecting failure, which requires
an immediate corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the managed object
could totally go out of service, restoring its capability.

 MJ [Major]:
MJ indicates for the Major Alarm that causes a service affecting failure which requires
an urgent corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the capability of the
managed object could be severely degraded, restoring its full capability.

 MN [Minor]:
MN indicates for the Minor Alarm that detects the existence of a non-service affecting
condition, which requires the corrective action in order to prevent a more serious (such
as a service affecting) failure. This condition does not degrade the capacity of the
managed object.

 WR [Warning]:
WR indicates for the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault, before
any significant effects have been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose (if
necessary) and correct the problem in order to prevent a more serious failure, such as a
service affecting fault.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-21

6.5.2 Conditions to Report


Following shows the conditions, their indications and the severity levels that 5000iPS
supports:

6.5.2.1 TRP/ MODEM Alarms & Status

Table 6-1 List of Alarms & Status - TRP/MODEM (1 of 5)

Indication Category Description Severity


TRP

SD receiving level is lower than the threshold level as


SD Level Alarm MJ
-3dB or more, and continues more than 90 sec.

SD Alarm Alarm SD module failure MJ

SD local receiving level is lower than the threshold


SD LO Alarm MJ
level.

Main receiving level is lower than the threshold level


Main Level Alarm MJ
as -3dB or more, and continues more than 90 sec.

Type of connected SD is not supported by 5000iPS


SD Type Mismatch Alarm System, or is not operational by the provisioned MJ
modulation settings.

SD DADE adjustment has been done or not to SD


DADE Adjust Status Status -
module.

SD Communic ation Alarm


CPU of SD fails, or IF cable between SD and TR
MJ
FAIL INTFC is disabled or is not connected.

SD Total Alarm Alarm TRP total alarm including SD module failure MJ

LO REF Alarm XPIC reference local signal is lost. MN

TX Power Alarm Transmitting power is lower than 3 dB. MJ

TRP Alarm Alarm TRP module failure MJ

TX Input Alarm TX IF Signal is out of range that is –29 dBm ±5 dB. MJ

Receiving level is lower than the threshold level that is


between –72 to –94 dBm according to the modulation
RX Level Alarm system and bit rates. MJ
When SD is equipped, it means the combined receive
level of Main and SD.

Mute Status Status TX Mute Control is ON or OFF. -

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-22 OPERATION MONITORING

Table 6-1 List of Alarms & Status - TRP/MODEM (2 of 5)

Indication Category Description Severity


TRP

TRP Communication Alarm CPU of TRP fails, or IF cable between TRP and TR MJ
FAIL INTFC is disabled or is not connected.

TRP Total Alarm Alarm TRP total alarm including TRP module failure MJ

TRP Type Mismatch Alarm Type of connected TRP is not supported by 5000iPS MJ
System, or is not operational by the provisioned
modulation settings.
Carrier Sweep Function Status Carrier Sweep is ON or OFF. -

TR INTFC Alarm Alarm TR INTFC module failure MJ

TR INTFC Communica- Alarm CPU of TR INTFC fails, or IF cable between TRP, TR MJ


tion FAIL INTFC and MODEM-T is disabled or is not con-
nected.
TRP Power Supply Alarm Power supply from MODEM to TR INTFC is stopped. MJ

FAN Alarm FAN UNIT failure. MJ


It should be changed to spare promptly

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-23

NOTE: When "TRP Type Mismatch" or "SD Type Mismatch" is detected some of mounted
module, following Warning Message Box will appear on a Web LCT screen.

This case may occur when mount the 5000S TRP/SD to 5000iPS System, or when
mount the 5000iPS SD which is not match with Receive Frequency Setting of this
system.

It should be checked the 5000S/5000iPS Check Box in front of TRP/SD, and Receive
Frequency Setting.

The Details of TRP/SD Type Mismatch occurrence is as follows.

(1) When TRP/SD Firmware version is not conformed to 5000iPS system

- TRP Firmware version "3.xx or 4.xx" is for 5000iPS, and "1.xx or 2.xx" is for
5000S.

- SD Firmware version "3.xx" is for 5000iPS, and "1.xx" is for 5000S.

It can be confirmed in Inventory information by Web LCT.

(2) When TRP/SD Hardware version is not conformed to 5000iPS system

- TRP Hardware version "xxBx" is for 5000iPS, and "xx0x" is for 5000S.

- SD Hardware version "xxBx" is for 5000iPS, and "xx0x" is for 5000S.

It can be confirmed in Inventory information by Web LCT.

(3) When Receive frequency setting value is not coincided with cover band of SD.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-24 OPERATION MONITORING

Table 6-1 List of Alarms & Status - TRP/MODEM (3 of 5)

Indication Category Description Severity

MODEM

ATPC Power Mode Status Indicates that a failure of APTC control signal (for 90
seconds), or a status of MAX Power (for 90 seconds) –
has been detected.

CLK FAIL Alarm Reference Clock failed. MN

Cluster Alarm Out Status Indicates that the Cluster Alarm is enabled to output. –

Communic ation Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed.


MJ
FAIL

Earl y Warning Alarm Radio signal is degraded (Early Warning threshold,


MN
where the threshold is 1E–9).

F rame ID Alarm Frame ID (route differentiation ID) and its expected


MJ
value do not match.

High BER Alarm Radio signal is degraded (High BER threshold, where
MJ
the threshold is 1E–3/1E–4/1E–9).

IF Cable Short Alarm IF Cable between MDP and TRP is short-circuited. MJ

In Phase Status Indicates that DADE status of the received signal be-
tween No. 1 and No. 2 MODEM interfaces are in

phase. While in this condition, a hitless switching-over
is available.

L2 SYNC Loss Alarm Frame Synchronization Loss has been detected from
MJ
GFP Frames on MODEM port.

LOF Alarm Loss of Frame at the Radio side. MJ

Lo w BER Alarm Radio signal is degraded (Low BER threshold, where


MN
the threshold is 1E–6/1E–7/1E–8/1E–9).

MOD Alarm Indicates the operating status of Modulator. If a fail-


MJ
ure occurs in the Modulator section, "Alarm" is issued.

MODEM Power Status Indicates if the power of MODEM Card is on or off.



Supply

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-25

Table 6-1 List of Alarms & Status - TRP/MODEM (4 of 5)

Indication Category Description Severity

MODEM

MODEM Power Alarm Indicates that the MODEM Card is powered off.
MJ
Supply Alarm

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

TRP Power Supply Alarm Power is not supplied to TRP. MJ

Online Status Status Indicates the online/offline status of MODEM Cards



configuring the 1+1 Protection.

RDI Alarm Remote Defect Indication has been detected at MO-


MJ
DEM port.

RX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the incoming direction at STM-1 Card.

RX Modulation Status Indicates that the modulation system at the receiving



side has been changed.

RX SW Status Status Indicates the state of Radio interface RX SW usage in



the redundant configuration.

TDM/ AMR Range Alarm Indicates a mismatching condition by detecting that


Mismatch the mapped numbers of E1 channels at TX MODEM
ports and those at RX MODEM ports do not match; or MJ
the range of RX AMR modulation and that of TX AMR
modulation do not match.

TX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the outgoing direction at STM-1 Card.

TX Modulation Status Indicates that the modulation system of MODEM at



the transmitting side has been changed.

TX SW Lock-in Status Indicates that TX SW is in the locked-in status.



Status

TX SW Reverse Status Indicates the receiving condition of the TX SW Signal



Request from the opposite station.

T ype Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information
MJ
do no match.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-26 OPERATION MONITORING

Table 6-1 List of Alarms & Status - TRP/MODEM (5 of 5)

Indication Category Description Severity

MODEM

UAE Alarm Unavailable Seconds Event has been detected. MN

Une quipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

Un locked Alarm Wireless synchronization status at the local side is set


MJ
to unlocked.

XIF Alarm Indicates the status of the XIF input signals at the
Main Master MODEM and Sub Master MODEM. If the
value of an XIF input signal drops to below the MJ
threshold, this alarm is issued and the XPIC function
is reset.

XPIC Mode Alarm A mismatch between provisioned settings of Main


Mismatch Master MDPMDP and those of Sub Master MDP has
been detected. This alarm is issued by detecting an
MJ
assignment of Master-Master or Slave-Slave, where a
Switch Group configuring XPIC must assign both
Master and Slave.

6.5.2.2 STM-1 Interface Alarm & Status

Table 6-2 List of Alarms & Status - STM-1 Interface (1 of 3)

Indication Category Description Severity

ALS Status ALS has suspended optical outputs at indicated STM-1



optical port.

APS Lock-in Status Status Indicates that APS Protection is in the locked-in status. –

APS Online Status Status Indicates the online status of APS Protection. –

APS Protection Status Indicates APS Line Protection Status, such as FS, SF,

Status SD, MS and NR.

APS SW Status Notifies that a selection of APS Protection has been



changed.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-27

AU AIS Alarm AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) has been detected from
MJ
AU (Administrative Unit) at STM-1 Port.

AU LOP Alarm Loss of AU Pointer has occurred at STM-1 Port. MJ

CLK FAIL Alarm Reference Clock failed. MN

Communication FAIL Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed. MJ

E1 AIS Generated Status Indicates for AIS generated on E1 Channel. –

HP PLM Alarm PLM (Payload Label Mismatch) has occurred in HOP


MJ
(Higher Order Path) at STM-1 Port.

HP RDI Alarm Received RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in HOP


MJ
(Higher Order Path) at STM-1 Port.

HP TIM Alarm HOP (Higher Order Path) Trace Identifier Mismatch


MJ
has occurred at STM-1 Port.

HP UNEQ Alarm HOP (Higher Order Path) Unequipped has been de-
MJ
tected at STM-1 Port.

LOM Alarm Indicates for Loss of Multi-frame on STM Port. MJ

LP PLM Alarm PLM (Payload Label Mismatch) has occurred in LP


MJ
(Lower Order Path) at STM-1 Port.

Table 6-2 List of Alarms & Status - STM-1 Interface (2 of 3)

Indication Category Description Severity

LP RDI Alarm Received RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in LP (Lower


Order Path) at STM-1 Port. MJ

LP UNEQ Alarm LP (Lower Order Path) Unequipped has been detected


MJ
at STM-1 Port.

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

MS AIS Alarm AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) has been detected from
MJ
MS (Multiplex Section) at STM-1 Port.

MS RDI Alarm Received RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in MS (Mul-


MJ
tiplex Section) at STM-1 Port.

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-28 OPERATION MONITORING

PJE Status PJE (Pointer Justification Event) has been generated



at STM Port.

RF Alarm Transmission failure has been detected on STM-1 Op-


MJ
tical port.

RS DEG Alarm Indicates for B1 Byte Error in RS (Regenerator Sec-


MN
tion) (RS – Degraded) on STM-1 Port.

RS EXC Alarm Indicates for the occurrence of B1 Byte Error in RS


MJ
(Regenerator Section) on STM-1 Port.

RS LOF Alarm Indicates that the Loss of SDH Frame Synchronization


has been detected from RS (Regenerator Section) on MJ
STM-1 Port.

RS TIM Alarm TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) has been detected


MJ
from RS (Regenerator Section) on STM-1 Port.

RS UAS Status Status Indicates that UAS Status has been detected at STM-1

Port. (Regenerator Section)

RX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the incoming direction at STM-1 Card.

SFP Removed Alarm Indicated port is vacant (no SFP is mounted). MJ

SFP Type Mismatch Alarm Installed SFP and its registered information do no
MJ
match.

Table 6-2 List of Alarms & Status - STM-1 Interface (3 of 3)

Indication Category Description Severity

STM-1 AIS Generated Status Indicates for AIS generated on STM-1 optical port. –

STM-1 LOS Alarm Loss of Signal has been detected on STM-1 Optical
MJ
port.

TU AIS Alarm AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) has been detected from
MJ
TU (Tributary Unit) at STM-1 Port.

TU LOP Alarm Loss of TU Pointer has occurred at STM-1 Port. MJ

TX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the outgoing direction at STM-1 Card.

Type Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information MJ

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-29

do no match.

Unequipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

6.5.2.3 E1 Interface Alarm & Status

Table 6-3 List of Alarms & Status - E1 Interface

Indication Category Description Severity


CLK FAIL Alarm Reference Clock failed. MN

Communication FAIL Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed. MJ

E1 AIS Alarm/ PDH-AIS [Alarm/Status category can be changed by


MJ / –
Status the AIS Received Condition setting.

E1 AIS Generated Status Indicates for AIS generated on every E1 Channel. –

E1 LOS Alarm Loss of Signal has been detected on E1 Port. MJ

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

RX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the incoming direction at STM-1 Card.

TX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the outgoing direction at STM-1 Card.

Type Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information
MJ
do no match.

Unequipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

Usage Error Alarm Input signal has been detected at an E1 port that is
MN
assigned to Unuse.

6.5.2.4 AUX Interface Alarm & Status

Table 6-4 List of Alarms & Status - AUX Interface

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-30 OPERATION MONITORING

Indication Category Description Severity

[assigned item] Status/Alar Indicates HKA status (Alarm/Normal) for each HKA in-
–/*
m put.

[assigned item] Status Indicates HKC status (Alarm/Normal) for each HKC out-

put.

Communication FAIL Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed. MJ

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

RX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the incoming direction at STM-1 Card.

TX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the outgoing direction at STM-1 Card.

Type Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information
MJ
do no match.

Unequipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

*: As an alarm, its severity level differs depending on the user assignments.

6.5.2.5 GbE Interface Alarm & Status

Ta ble 6-5 List of Alarms & Status - GbE Interface (1 of 2)

Indication Category Description Severity

CLK FAIL Alarm Reference Clock failed. MN

Communication FAIL Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed. MJ

ETH LOS Alarm Loss of Signal has been detected at the indicated
MJ
Ethernet optical port.

ETH TF Alarm Transmission failure has been detected at the indi-



cated Ethernet optical port.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-31

Ta ble 6-5 List of Alarms & Status - GbE Interface (2 of 2)

Indication Category Description Severity

Flow Control Status Indicates Flow Control status of the indicated Ethernet

port.

LAN Link Alarm Link of the LAN Port has been disconnected. MJ

LLF Status Indicates the setting of Link Loss Forwarding. –

LLF Message Time- Status Loss of a conditional signaling in which the LLF control
out signal should be received continuously from the oppo- –
site radio equipment.

MDI/MDI-X Status Indicates MDI status of the indicated Ethernet port. –

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

RX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the incoming direction at STM-1 Card.

SFP Port Type Status Indicates an SFP Port type, optic or electric. –

SFP Removed Alarm Indicated port is vacant (no SFP is mounted). MJ

SFP Type Mismatch Alarm Installed SFP and its registered information do no
MJ
match.

Speed & Duplex Status Indicates the specified LAN Port Setting for the speed

rate and duplex mode.

TX BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected in
MJ
the outgoing direction at STM-1 Card.

Type Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information
MJ
do no match.

Unequipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

6.5.2.6 MDP Alarm & Status

Ta ble 6-6 List of Alarms & Status - MDP (1 of 4)

Indication Category Description Severity


ETH-OAM LOC Alarm Indicates Ether OAM Loss of Continuity. MJ

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-32 OPERATION MONITORING

ETH-OAM Mismatch Alarm Ether OAM Mismatch has been detected. MN

ETH-OAM RDI Alarm Received Ether OAM RDI (Remote Defect Indication). MJ

ETH-OAM Unexpected Alarm Ether OAM Unexpected MEP and Ether OAM Unex-
MN
MEP pected Period have been detected.

FDB Full Status FDB Full indication is specified per VLAN. –

Total FDB Full Status Dynamic Entry in L2Switch has reached the maximum

number.

Main Card

BUS Error Alarm Data communication BUS failure has been detected. MJ

CLK Drift Alarm Drift condition has been detected from Reference
MN
Clock Source Frequency.

CLK FAIL Alarm Reference Clock failed. MN

CLK Status Status Indicates that a change has been made to Reference
Cha nged Clock.
(1) (Locked Ref 1)
(2) (Locked Ref2) MJ
(3) (Locked Ref3)
(4) Holdover
(5) Freerun

CLk 2M Mount Status Indicates the status of mounted CLK2 Module.



Status

EXT CLK AIS Alarm AIS (Alarm Indicaton Signal) has been detected from
MN
External Clock Input.

EXT CLK LOOP Alarm Indicated EXTERNAL Clock Input is used as EXTER-
MJ
NAL Clock Output.

Ta ble 6-6 List of Alarms & Status - MDP (2 of 4)

Indication Category Description Severity


Main Card

EXT CLK LOS Alarm Loss of signal has been detected from External Clock
MN
Input.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-33

EXT CLK Mount Status Indicates the status of mounted EXTCLK Module.

Status

EXT CLK Output Status Indicates the status of mounted EXTCLK Outputs.

Status

EXT CLK Quality Status Indicates the quality level of EXTCLK Outputs.

Level

EXT CLK Type Alarm A type of EXT CLK actually installed and its registered
MJ
Mismatch information do no match.

EXT CLK Alarm CLK2M Module is dismounted.


MJ
Une quipped

EXT LOF Alarm Loss of Frame has been detected from External Clocl
MJ
Input.

MDP CPU Alarm Alarm MDP CPU alarm. MN

LTI Alarm Loss of Incoming Timing Inputs have been detected. MJ

Main Card Alarm Alarm Main Card failure. MJ

Main Card CPU Alarm Failure of Main Card CPU has been detected.
MJ
Alarm

Main Card Memory Alarm Failure of Main Card Memory has been detected.
MJ
FAIL

Main Card USB FAIL Alarm Failure of USB Port on Main Card has been detected. MJ

Maintenance Status Indicates that the system is set into the Maintenance

mode.

Memory FAIL Alarm Memory failure has been detected. MJ

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

PPS FAIL Alarm Both input signals of the paths configuring PPS failed. MJ

Ta ble 6-6 List of Alarms & Status - MDP (3 of 4)

Indication Category Description Severity


Main Card

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-34 OPERATION MONITORING

SNCP Protection Status Indicates for Path Protection Switching status.



Status

SNCP SW Status Path Protection Switching was carried out. –

Sque lch Status External CLK Output is in the squelch condition. –

SSM Fail Alarm Received Sync Status Message value is in unstable


MN
condition.

T emperature Alarm The temperature exceeds the threshold. MN

USB FAIL Alarm USB memory failure has been detected. MJ

PS

Power Supply Alarm This alarm is issued if the power failure occurs. MJ

Une quipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no Card is installed). MJ

FAN

FA N FAIL Alarm Indicates a FAN-M failure.


MJ
It should be changed to spare promptly

Une quipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no FAN Card is installed). MJ

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-35

Ta ble 6-6 List of Alarms & Status - MDP (4 of 4)

Indication Category Description Severity


TERM

Communic ation Alarm Controls of equipment internal communication failed.


MJ
FAIL

Module Alarm Equipment failure. MJ

TERM Card Change Status Indicates that a change has been made to TERM

Card.

T ype Mismatch Alarm A Card actually installed and its registered information
MJ
do no match.

Une quipped Alarm Indicated slot is vacant (no TERM Card is installed). MJ

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-36 OPERATION MONITORING

6.6 Current Metering

6.6.1 Metering Items


Following items can be set to measure:

Ta ble 6-7 Metering Items

Item Description

TX Power Indicates the RF Transmit Power level.

When SD is not equipped, it indicates the RF Receive


Signal Level.
RX Level
When SD is equipped, it indicates the combined RF
Receive Signal Level.
When SD is not equipped, it's masked as gray color.
Main RX Level When SD is equipped, it indicates the Main RF
Receive Signal Level.
When SD is not equipped, it's masked as gray color.
SD RX Level When SD is equipped, it indicates the SD RF Receive
Signal Level.

TRP Power Supply Indicates the power supply voltage level fed to TRP.

BER Indicates the BER measurement value.

6.6.2 View Current Metering Setting

Procedure 6-1

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Metering to select Current Metering. The
Current Metering window appears.

3. Click the target MODEM to specify its metering settings. The Current Metering option
window appears.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-37

Figure 6-27 Current Metering Window

4. Click the Normal Speed / High Speed radio button provided for the Refresh Cycle
option to specify the period of retrieving data:

Figure 6-28 Current Metering Option Box

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-38 OPERATION MONITORING

Ta ble 6-8 Current Metering Option Box Parameter

Parameter Value Description

Refresh Cycle Normal Speed (10sec) Refreshes measured value every 10 seconds.

High Speed (3sec) Refreshes measured values every 3 seconds.

NOTES:

1. If a parameter indicates the abnormal value, check the Current Status


and the performance monitor (Current/History PMON/RMON Report),
and operate the loopback test to isolate the alarmed sections from the
normal sections.

2. RX LEVEL varies depending on the received RF signal level.

5. When completed, click the Cancel button on top of the Current Metering window.

This step ends the procedure.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-39

6.7 Performance Monitoring


The Performance Monitoring (PM) is used to identify and isolate the problem if occurred at a
particular line or path. This function also monitors the quality of lines and paths. All
Performance Monitoring parameters are collected every minute and accumulated to 15-minute
and 24-hour (1 day) statistics.

6.7.1 PM Parameters
5000iPS supports the following PM parameters:

6.7.1.1 Performance Monitor Items

Ta ble 6-9 PM Items for MODEM

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RF BBE Background Block Error The sum of the background block error. ITU-T G.826

RF ES Errored Second The cumulative time in which more than ITU-T G.826
one block error per second was detected.

RF SES Severely Errored Second The cumulative time in which the BER of a ITU-T G.826
one second period exceeded a set per-
centage (30%).

RF SEP Severely Errored Period The cumulative time in which the BER of a ITU-T G.826
one second period exceeded 10E-3.

RF UAS Unavailable Second The cumulative time in which the unit re- ITU-T G.826
mained inoperative.

RF OFS Out of Frame Second The total number of seconds of Out of ITU-T G.826
Frame condition, which is generated in 15
minute-blocks. (OFS is applied to the To-
tal only).

RX LEV RX Level The minimum and maximum reception ITU-T G.826


level. If two routes exist, monitoring takes
place for No. 1 and 2 respectively).

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-40 OPERATION MONITORING

T able 6-10 PM Items for SDH/PDH

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RS BBE Near-end Background Block Error ITU-T G.826 G.784

ES Near-end Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SES Near-end Severely Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SEP Near-end Severely Error Period –

UAS Unavailable Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

OFS Out of Frame Seconds ITU-T G.784

DMR-RS BBE Near-end Background Block Error ITU-T G.826 G.784

ES Near-end Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SES Near-end Severely Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SEP Near-end Severely Error Period v

UAS Unavailable Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

OFS Out of Frame Seconds ITU-T G.784

MS BBE Near-end Background Block Error ITU-T G.826 G.784

ES Near-end Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SES Near-end Severely Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SEP Near-end Severely Error Period –

UAS Unavailable Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

E1 E1 CV Near-end Code Violation –

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-41

Ta ble 6-11 PM Items for LAN (1 of 3)

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RX Octs The total number of octets received on the interface, RFC2819


including framing characters.

TX Octs The total number of octets transmitted out of the inter- RFC2819
face, including framing characters.

RX Pkts Number of packets received (including bad packets, all RFC2819


Unicast, Broadcast packets, and Multicast packets).

TX Pkts The total number of packets transmitted. RFC2819

RX Drop Events A count of drop packets. RFC2819

RX Undersize Pkts Number of packets received that were less than 64 oc- RFC2819
tets long and were otherwise well formed

RX Fragments Number of error frames of less than 64 octets in trans- RFC2819


mission data length.

RX 64Octs Number of received packets that were 64 octets in RFC2819


length (including error packets).

TX 64Octs Number of transmitted packets that are 64 octets in RFC2819


length (including error packets).

RX 65 to 127Octs Number of received packets that were between 65 and RFC2819


127 octets in length (including error packets)

TX 65 to 127Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819


between 65 and 127 octets in length (including error
packets).

RX128 to 255Octs Number of received packets that were between 128 and RFC2819
255 octets in length (including error packets).

TX128 to 255Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819
between 128 and 255 octets in length (including error
packets).

RX 256 to 511Octs Number of received packets that were between 256 and RFC2819
511 octets in length (including error packets).

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-42 OPERATION MONITORING

Ta ble 6-11 PM Items for LAN (2 of 3)

Monitor Type Description Spec.

TX 256 to 511Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819
between 256 and 511 octets in length (including error
packets).

RX 512 to 1023Octs Number of received packets that were between 512 and RFC2819
1023 octets in length (including error packets).

TX 512 to 1023Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819
between 512 and 1023 octets in length (including error
packets).

RX 1024 to 1518Octs Number of received packets that were between 1023 RFC2819
and 1518 octets in length (including error packets).

TX 1024 to 1518Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (including error
packets).

RX CRC Alignment Errors Number of reception alignments of FCS error frames. RFC2819

RX Oversize Pkts A count of frames received on a particular interface that RFC2819


exceeds maximum size bytes.

RX Jabbers Number of error frames bigger than 1519 octets in re- RFC2819
ceive data length.

RX Multicast Pkts Number of good multicast packets received (excluding RFC2819


broadcast packets).

TX Multicast Pkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols RFC2819
requested to be transmitted to a multicast address.

RX Broadcast Pkts Number of good broadcast packets received. RFC2819

TX Broadcast Pkts The total number of packets that are higher-level proto- RFC2819
cols requested to be transmitted to a broadcast address.

TX Collisions Number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. RFC2819

RX Unknown TPID Number of abandoned frames included in unsetting RFC2819


TPID frames received.

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-43

Ta ble 6-11 PM Items for LAN (3 of 3)

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RX Unknown VID Number of abandoned frames included in unsetting VID RFC2819


frames received.

RX MAC Limit Number of frames discarded due to exceeding MAC RFC2819


learning Limit.

RX Filter Discard Number of frames abandoned by input filtering function. RFC2819

RX QoS Discard Number of frames abandoned by Policing function of RFC2819


input port.

TX Queue0 Discard Number of QoS frames discard by transmission RFC2819


Queue0.

TX Queue1 Discard Number of QoS frames discard by transmission RFC2819


Queue1.

TX Queue2 Discard Number of QoS frames discard by transmission RFC2819


Queue2.

TX Queue3 Discard Number of QoS frames discard by transmission RFC2819


Queue3.

Per VLAN Rx Frames Number of frames received as particular VLAN RFC2819

Per VLAN Tx Frames Number of frames transmitted as particular VLAN RFC2819

Per VLAN Rx QoS Discard Number of discarded frames per VLAN basis. RFC2819

6.7.1.2 PM Counter Range

T able 6-12 MODEM PM Counter Range

Monitor 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range


Type

RF OFS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-44 OPERATION MONITORING

RF BBE It depends on radio setting It depends on radio setting


(CS and Modulation). (CS and Modulation).

RF ES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF SES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF SEP 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF UAS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

T able 6-13 SDH/PDH PM Counter Range

Monitor 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range


Type

OFS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

BBE 0 to 16777215 0 to 1610612640

ES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

SES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

SEP 0 to 900 0 to 86400

UAS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

E1 CV 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-45

T able 6-14 LAN PM Counter Range (1 of 2)

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

RX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Drop Events 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Undersize Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Fragments 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 64Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 64Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 65 to 127Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 65 to 127Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 128 to 255Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 128 to 255Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 256 to 511Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 256 to 511Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 512 to 1023Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 512 to 1023Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 1024 to 1518Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 1024 to 1518Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX CRC Alignment Errors 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Oversize Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-46 OPERATION MONITORING

T able 6-14 LAN PM Counter Range (2 of 2)

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

RX Jabbers 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Collisions 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Unknown TPID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Unknown VID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX MAC Limit 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Filter Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX QoS Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue0 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue1 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue2 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue3 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Rx Frames 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Tx Frames 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Rx QoS Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

6.7.1.3 TCN Threshold

Table 6- 15 MODEM TCN Threshold

Monitor 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold


Type
Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-47

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

RF OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF BBE These depend on the radio setting (CS These depend on the radio settings (CS
and Modulation). and Modulation).

RF ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RX LEV –99 to –30 These depend on the radio –99 to –30 These depend on the radio
setting (CS and Modula- setting (CS and Modula-
tion). tion).

Table 6- 16 MODEM RX LEV TCN Default Threshold

Modulation CS = 28 MHz CS = 40 MHz


Type

64QAM -80dBm -79dBm

128QAM -77dBm -76dBm

256QAM -74dBm -73dBm

Table 6- 17 MODEM RF BBE TCN Threshold

Modulation Type 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold

Default Threshold Default Threshold


CS Modulation Range Range
Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-48 OPERATION MONITORING

28M 64QAM 1 to
24170 2417
1 to
2320320 232032
2417000 232032000

128QAM 1 to
28200 2820
1 to
2707200 270720
2820000 270720000

256QAM 1 to
32230 3223
1 to
3094080 309408
3223000 309408000

56M 64QAM 1 to
32280 3228
1 to
3098880 309888
3228000 309888000

128QAM 1 to
38290 3829
1 to
3675840 367584
3829000 367584000

256QAM 1 to
44310 4431
1 to
4253760 425376
4431000 425376000

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E


OPERATION MONITORING 6-49

Table 6- 18 SDH/PDH TCN Threshold

Monitor 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H PM TCN Threshold


Type
Default Threshold Default Threshold
Range Range
Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

RS OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS BBE 1 to 65534 6560 1 to 6291260 629130


16777215 1610612640

RS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS BBE 1 to 65534 6560 1 to 6291260 629130


16777215 1610612640

DMR RS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS BBE 1 to 65534 6560 1 to 6291260 629130


16777215 1610612640

MS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

NS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

E1 CV 1 to 65534 650 1 to 6291260 629130


4294967295 4294967295

NWD-134140-01E 5000iPS: OPERATION


6-50/END OPERATION MONITORING

Table 6- 19 LAN TCN Threshold

Monitor Type 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold

Default Default
Range Range
Threshold Threshold

Drop Event 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Undersize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Fragment Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

CRC Alignment Error 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Oversize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Collisions 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

5000iPS: OPERATION NWD-134140-01E

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen